JP6439117B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes a plurality of specific areas and is capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a game value when a game ball flows into any of the specific areas .

Conventionally, a variable winning device that can be converted into a first state (closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player and a second state (open state) that is advantageous for the player in the game area, and a start winning opening that allows the game ball to win And a start game for converting the variable prize device to the second state for a predetermined time based on the winning of the game ball at the start prize opening, and the game ball won in the variable prize device as a result of the start game is When a special winning area (specific area) flows, a big hit state is generated, and the variable winning device is converted to the second state based on a predetermined rule, so that a large number of winnings can be obtained. A gaming machine is known.
In such a gaming machine, a guidance device for guiding the winning game ball so as to easily flow into the special winning area is provided inside the variable winning device (winning space), leading to the winning space of the variable winning device. If the game ball is guided by the guidance device in a timely manner, it flows into the special winning area with a high probability.
The induction device is operated by an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, and the operation is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ball has won the start winning opening, and can be operated for a predetermined time. It is common. Therefore, when the game ball won in the variable winning device has the operation timing of the guidance device, it flows into the special winning area with a high probability (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2000-334103 A

By the way, in the opening pattern of the variable winning device in the starting game (opening pattern of the big winning opening), there are a plurality of types of patterns having different degrees of advantage for the player. The big hit state (special game state) also includes a plurality of types of states having different degrees of advantage for the player.
However, in order to determine which kind of big hit state is generated depending on whether the opening pattern of the variable winning device is the first opening pattern or the second opening pattern that is more advantageous than the first opening pattern. If the distribution ratio is the same, the interest of the game cannot be enhanced.
An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
With multiple specific areas,
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a gaming ball flows into any of the specific areas,
A display device that displays a stop symbol selected from a plurality of stop symbols after variably displaying a plurality of identification symbols;
Based on the selected stop symbol, an opening pattern determining means for determining an opening pattern of a special winning opening,
Round number determination means for determining the number of round games in the special gaming state based on the selected stop symbol and the specific area into which the game ball has flowed,
The plurality of stop symbols include a plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to the first release pattern of the release patterns, and a second release pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first release pattern of the release patterns. A plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to
The plurality of first stop symbols are more advantageous to the player than the plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to the first number of round games and the first number of round games. Including a first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times,
The plurality of second stop symbols includes a plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times, and a second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times,
Said first number of times, both when you different values corresponding to the specific area game ball has flown, the second number is a fixed value regardless of the specific area gaming ball has flowed,
A ratio at which a first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of first stop symbols, and a second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times from the plurality of second stop symbols. and the proportion is selected, but depends,
The highest selected ratio of the first stopped symbols corresponding to the first number of times and the highest selected proportion of the second stopped symbols corresponding to the first number of times. In the second stop symbol, the round lottery effect in which the number of round games is apparently drawn is not executed,
Selection among the first stop symbols other than the first stop symbol with the highest selected ratio among the plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times and the plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times in the second stop symbol rate is other than the highest second stop symbols to be, the round drawing effect is performed, characterized in Rukoto.

The invention according to claim 3
With multiple specific areas,
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a gaming ball flows into any of the specific areas,
A display device that displays a stop symbol selected from a plurality of stop symbols after variably displaying a plurality of identification symbols;
Based on the selected stop symbol, an opening pattern determining means for determining an opening pattern of a special winning opening,
Round number determination means for determining the number of round games in the special gaming state based on the selected stop symbol and the specific area into which the game ball has flowed,
The plurality of stop symbols include a plurality of first stop symbols and a plurality of second stop symbols,
The plurality of first stop symbols are more advantageous to the player than the plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to the first number of round games and the first number of round games. Including a first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times,
The plurality of second stop symbols includes a plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times, and a second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times,
Said first number of times, both when you different values corresponding to the specific area game ball has flown, the second number is a fixed value regardless of the specific area gaming ball has flowed,
The first stop symbol corresponding to the first number of times corresponds to a first release pattern of the release patterns,
The first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times corresponds to a symbol corresponding to the first release pattern and a second release pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first release pattern of the release patterns. And including
The second stop symbol corresponding to the first number of times and the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times correspond to the second release pattern,
A ratio at which a first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of first stop symbols, and a second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times from the plurality of second stop symbols. the percentage being selected, but Ri same der,
The highest selected ratio of the first stopped symbols corresponding to the first number of times and the highest selected proportion of the second stopped symbols corresponding to the first number of times. In the second stop symbol, the round lottery effect in which the number of round games is apparently drawn is not executed,
Selection among the first stop symbols other than the first stop symbol with the highest selected ratio among the plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times and the plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times in the second stop symbol rate is other than the highest second stop symbols to be, the round drawing effect is performed, characterized in Rukoto.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be enhanced.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a figure explaining a collective display apparatus. It is a figure explaining a collective display apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is the front view and front side perspective view of a variable winning apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ball flow path formation member of a variable prize apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of the big winning opening unit of the variable winning device. It is a disassembled perspective view of the drum accessory unit of the big prize opening unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the floor part of a drum accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the floor part of a drum accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the floor part of a drum accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the taiko instrument of a taiko instrument unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a drum accessory. It is a figure explaining the function of the left bottom part of a drum accessory, and a right bottom part. It is a disassembled perspective view of the drum accessory base unit of the drum accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of V movable accessory unit of a big prize opening unit. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the drum combination base unit of the drum combination unit and the V movable member of the V movable combination unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the V movable member of V movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the V movable member of V movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the V movable member of V movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the V movable member of V movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the arrangement position of the 1st V production switch. It is a figure explaining the structure of the discharge flow path unit of a drum accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the structure of the discharge flow path unit of a drum accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the determination apparatus of a big prize opening unit. It is a front side perspective view of a determination apparatus. It is a figure explaining the structure of the horizontal movable member and horizontal base member of a determination apparatus. It is a figure explaining the structure of the vertical movable member of a determination apparatus. It is a timing chart explaining the initialization operation | movement of an accessory. It is a timing chart explaining the small hit operation of an accessory. It is a timing chart explaining jackpot operation | movement of an accessory. It is a timing chart explaining the ball biting processing operation of an accessory. It is a block diagram of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an input process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows an output process. It is a flowchart which shows payout command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port abnormal winning prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening ball clogging monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows a residual sphere monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a game stop error process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port switch process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing starter switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize mouth count update process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific area switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure power-on operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hits. 5 is a flowchart showing a small hitting operation setting transition process and a timing chart of the small hitting operation. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit operation | movement transition setting process, and a timing chart of a big hit operation. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows production command setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory solenoid control process. It is a flowchart which shows a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a motor control process. It is a flowchart which shows a motor operation | movement edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a motor operation | movement edit process. It is a flowchart which shows abnormal discharge | emission monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a game stop error status update process. It is a flowchart which shows a fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a discharge control process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a pulse signal edit process, and a timing chart of the operation | movement of main prize ball signal transmission. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution setting of the open pattern and jackpot round in each special figure. It is a figure which shows the modification of the distribution setting of the open pattern and jackpot round in each special figure. It is a figure explaining an example of return operation at the time of the end of small hits. It is a figure explaining an example of return operation at the time of the end of small hits. It is a figure which shows the modification of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the 3rd relay board | substrate and container which concern on embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 1 is a side view showing a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a side view showing a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the effect control board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the back surface of the game board which concerns on embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, as a first embodiment of the present invention, a configuration example when applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
Here, a pachinko machine as a suitable example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, in particular, a pachinko machine of a type belonging to a so-called feather object will be described sequentially from FIG.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 1 (game machine) of this example.
The pachinko machine 1 is supported by a machine frame (main body frame) 2 that is fixed to an island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 2 at a hinge portion 3 so that the machine can be rotated. A front frame 4 that can be opened and closed with respect to the frame 2 is provided. A game board 30 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.

A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 32 (to be described later) of the game board 30 is visible from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be opened and closed.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to as a game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are described.
An operation panel 6 is provided below the glass frame 5.
Normally, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a CR unit (card type ball lending control unit) as a game medium lending device, but the illustration is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer), and a game area is obtained by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front surface with a guide rail 31. 32 is formed. The game area 32 is an area in which a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and is judged to be out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won), and when the game ball enters the winning opening and is effectively safe Is configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to an upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as a prize ball).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4.

Moreover, the upper plate 7 provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds a game ball before being discharged as a prize ball or a rental ball.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 that can move a game ball on the upper plate 7 by a player's operation, and a launch operation handle 11 that performs a launch operation of the game ball. The lower dish 10 is provided with a lower dish ball removing operation portion 10 a that is operated when discharging the game balls stored in the lower dish 10.

In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 5 so that decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, lamps or LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) ) To emit light for lighting (flashing)) (arranged on the left and right sides of the frame as shown in FIG. 1), speakers (upper speakers) 13a that emit sound (for example, sound effects), 13b is provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 13 c is also provided below the front frame 4. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speakers (upper speakers) 13a and 13b and the speaker (lower speaker) 13c. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp | ramp for alerting | reporting abnormality in the predetermined site | part of the glass frame 5. FIG.
The frame decoration device 12 on the right side when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1 is one of auxiliary effect devices capable of executing an auxiliary effect that is an effect performed in response to an effect (game effect) according to the progress of the game. The right side protrusion part 12a which makes | forms is provided. The right side protruding portion 12a is provided so as to protrude from the right side surface of the front frame 4 so that a player playing a game on the gaming machine 1 can visually recognize and play a game on the gaming machine 1. It is also visible from people other than the player who is.

Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 7 is an upper plate decoration portion 7a, and an effect button switch 15a (shown in FIG. 36) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper plate decoration portion 7a. ) Is provided. Further, a touch panel 16 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 15.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 16 is provided integrally with the effect button 15, but the touch panel 16 may be separate from the effect button 15. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 15, The touch panel 16 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the production button 15, a ball lending button 17 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge that is operated to discharge a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 18 and a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card are provided.
In the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the player rotates the firing operation handle 11, the game ball supplied from the upper plate 7 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30 is supplied to the game ball 30 by the hitting ball launching device. Fire towards. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 15 or the touch panel 16, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened can be performed.

B. Configuration of Game Board FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 1 (game machine) of this example. In FIG. 2, reference numeral 31 denotes a guide rail of the game board 30, and as described above, the game area 32 is formed by surrounding the substantially circular area on the front surface of the game board 30 with the guide rail 31.
A pair of first start winning ports 33a and 33b (first starting ports) are provided in the lower part of the game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31 of the game board 30 so as to be separated from left and right. A second start winning port 34 (second start port) is provided in the center between the ports 33a and 33b.
The pair of first start winning ports 33a and 33b (first start ports) are also referred to as a left start port and a right start port, respectively. The second start winning opening 34 (second start opening) is also referred to as a medium start opening.
The first start winning ports 33a and 33b are respectively provided with a left start port switch 105 and a right start port switch 106 (shown in FIG. 35) for detecting a game ball won in the first start winning ports 33a and 33b. Has been. Further, the second start winning opening 34 is provided with a middle start opening switch 107 (shown in FIG. 35) for detecting a game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 34. In addition, a variable winning device 35 is provided in the center of the game area 32.

  In addition to the hitting direction changing member called a windmill, a number of obstacle nails, the game area 32 is provided with general winning holes 36a and 36b, an out hole 37, and the like. Among these, each of the general winning ports 36a, 36b has a winning port switch 102 (1 to n depending on the number of general winning ports) for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning ports 36a, 36b ( 35) is provided.

The variable winning device 35 is attached from the front side of the game board unit 38 to a mounting opening 38a (shown in FIG. 5) formed in the game board unit 38, and forms a winning space 41 that is open on the front side. A winning space forming member 42 is provided. Further, the front side of the variable prize apparatus 35 is in a state of projecting to the vicinity of the glass plate covering the front surface of the game board 30, and the game ball is placed in the variable prize apparatus 35 except when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened. Is prevented from entering.
In addition, the variable winning device 35 is provided with decorative members 48a and 48b which are decorated to imitate human beings. The decorative members 48a and 48b may be configured to be operable.

As shown in FIG. 2, an upper structural member (armor member) 44 is provided on the upper portion of the winning space 41 so as to protrude forward from the surface of the game board 30, and functions as a decoration device on the upper portion of the variable winning device 35. At the same time, the game ball flowing down from above the variable winning device 35 is prevented from entering the winning space 41 and is guided in the left-right direction. The upper structural member 44 is provided with an information display 45.
The information display 45 displays information according to the gaming state, and can display a plurality of pieces of identification information (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.). The information display 45 displays a demonstration screen, a display when a game ball wins the start winning opening 33a, 33b, 34, and a game ball that wins a specific area provided in the determination device 80 (when a special game occurs). ), Display during special game state, etc., display related to various game states.
Note that the information display 45 is not controlled by a game control device 100 (FIG. 35), which will be described later, but is controlled by an effect control device 300 as shown in FIG.

The information display 45 has a configuration in which two 7-segment LEDs are arranged, and displays various gaming states with combinations of the respective LEDs.
Various 7-segment LEDs are used to play various game states when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first start opening) (that is, when the game ball wins the start winning opening 33a, 33b) Display, when a game ball wins a specific area provided in the determination device 80 (display when a special game is generated, display during a special game state, etc.), or when the game ball is a second start winning port 34 (second Various game states performed when winning at the start opening (that is, display when the game ball has won at the start winning opening 34, when the game ball has won a specific area provided in the determining device 80 (special game occurrence) Display), display during special gaming state, etc.).
As for the hold, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening), only one special figure is held (holding of the special figure 2). When the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first start opening) is won, the special figure is not held (the special figure 1 is not held). Therefore, only the special figure 2 is displayed on the special figure hold display.
In the first embodiment, the information display 45 includes an LED. However, the information display 45 is not limited thereto, and may include a display such as a liquid crystal display, an EL display, or a CRT display.
Further, the installation location of the information display 45 is not limited to the location shown in FIG.

  In addition, on the lower right side of the game board 30, a collective display device 50 is provided outside the guide rail 31. The collective display device 50 has two 7-segment LEDs and a plurality of small dot LEDs. It is configured. The collective display device 50 displays a so-called special figure (this special figure), and also displays a special display (this special figure) on-hold display (in some cases, a special figure hold display) and a game state display. For example, it is constituted by a plurality of indicators (for example, a indicator composed of one small lamp, or a seven-segment indicator capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) using LED as a light source. . For example, among the LED segments in the collective display device 50, those that display the special figure 1 are arranged as a special figure 1 display, and those that display the special figure 2 are arranged as a special figure 2 display.

As shown in FIG. 3A, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure) for a special figure 1 variable display game constituted by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. Fluctuation display section) D1 and special figure 2 For special display 2 display for variable display game (second special figure fluctuation display section) D2 and for notification of the start memory number of special figure 2 fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps and the like Storage display units D11 and D12.
The collective display device 50 includes round display units D3 to D6 configured by LED lamps or the like.
In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit D7, D8 indicating that it is a big hit (in a special game state) as a state display unit, and a predetermined number of times (here, the end of the previous special game state) The second game state display units D9, D10, and D13 to D18 that indicate a continuous big hit, which is a case where a special game state is generated again by executing the special figure variation display game within 10 times).

As shown in FIG. 3 (a) and FIG. 3 (b), the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display D1 and the special figure 2 display D2 is changed by blinking the central segment during the fluctuation display. Display that it is in the middle. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example.
In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display D1, as shown in FIG. 3A, it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments in addition to the central segment. In addition, the eighth segment is also blinked to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished.
Then, with the end of the variation time, the stop symbol set at the start of the special diagram variation display game is displayed as a result.

The memory display units D11 and D12 are turned on as shown in FIG.
The round display portions D3 to D6 are all turned off when they are not in the special gaming state, and a part corresponding to the number of rounds determined by the determination device 80 is turned on during the special gaming state. Become. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment display. In this embodiment, when the number of rounds is 16, the round display portions D3 and D5 are lit as shown in FIG. 3D, and when the number of rounds is 8, as shown in FIG. When the round display portions D3 and D6 are turned on and the number of rounds is 5, the round display portions D4 and D6 are turned on as shown in FIG.

The first game state display units D7 and D8 are constituted by LED lamps or the like, and indicate whether or not they are in a special game state (during a big hit). As shown in FIG. Turns on when it is, and turns off when it is not in a special gaming state.
The second game state display units D9, D10, and D13 to D18 are constituted by LED lamps and the like, and indicate that they are in a special game state that is a continuous big hit, as shown in FIG. 4 (d). It is turned on during the special game state, and is turned off when it is not in the special game state that is a consecutive big hit.
By including the second game state display units D9, D10, and D13 to D18, more LEDs are turned on when there is a continuous big hit than when it is not a continuous big hit, and at first glance it may be a continuous big hit. I will understand.
As a result, it is possible to show the player that the game is a continuous big hit, so that the player can have a great sense of achievement and can show that the player is a continuous big hit. A sense of superiority can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, since it is possible to indicate to the store clerk of the game store that there is a continuous big hit, it is possible to warn whether or not a big hit due to fraudulent acts has occurred if the consecutive big hits are frequent.

FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 30.
As shown in FIG. 5, the gaming board 30 includes a gaming board unit 38, a variable winning device 35 that is attached to the mounting opening 38 a of the gaming board unit 38 from the front side of the gaming board unit 38, and the gaming board unit 38. And a control base unit 39 mounted from the rear side of the game board unit 38.

FIG. 6A is a front view of the variable winning device 35, and FIG. 6B is a front side perspective view of the variable winning device 35. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 35.
As shown in FIG. 7, the variable prize winning device 35 includes a center case unit (front surface component) 35a, and a big prize opening unit (back surface component) attached to the center case unit 35a from the rear side of the center case unit 35a. 35b, and large winning opening solenoids 201 and 202 and a heat radiating plate 35c attached to the center case unit 35a from the rear side of the large winning opening unit 35b.

As shown in FIG. 6, an accessory device 51 (guidance device) is provided below the winning space 41.
The left and right movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened, so that the game ball flows into the winning space 41 and passes through the ball flow path formed by the ball flow path forming member 47. Yes. The sphere that flows into the winning space 41 and passes through the sphere channel formed by the sphere channel forming member 47 is distributed by the central accessory device 51 and flows into the discharge channel or the determination device 80 in the variable prize device 35. It is supposed to be. Note that there is a possibility of a big hit only when proceeding to the decision device 80.

  The movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 have a center of rotation at their lower end portions (base end portions), and the first big winning opening solenoid 201 and second controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The big winning opening solenoid 202 (illustrated in FIG. 35) can be rotated left and right. In a state where the movable members 43a and 43b are substantially vertical, the movable members 43a and 43b are in a state where the winning space 41 is blocked, and the game ball cannot enter the variable winning device 35. That is, this state is a first state that is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, in a state where the left and right movable members 43a and 43b are pivoted away from each other around the lower end, the movable members 43a and 43b open in a reverse “C” shape to open the winning space 41. It becomes an open state, and a state where a winning to the variable winning device 35 is possible. That is, this state is a second state that is advantageous to the player. When neither the starting game state nor the special game state is set (in the normal game state and the special game standby state), the movable members 43a and 43b are kept closed (first state).

The movable members 43a and 43b are used in the special game shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 in the start game based on the establishment of the start condition (here, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 33a, 33b or the second starting winning port 34). Are changed for a predetermined time, and then converted into the second state in a predetermined manner by driving the first big prize winning solenoid 201 and the second big prize winning solenoid 202 (shown in FIG. 35) (so-called small hitting operation, Details will be described later), and a chance to win a prize winning device 35 is obtained. Here, the special drawings 1 and 2 are the special drawings displayed by the LEDs of the collective display device 50.
That is, based on the fact that the game balls that have won the first start winning opening 33a, 33b are detected by the left start opening switch 105 and the right start opening switch 106, the special figure 1 fluctuates for a predetermined time, and all stop symbols are displayed. As a result, the opening is performed once. Similarly, based on the fact that the game ball won in the second start winning opening 34 is detected by the middle start opening switch 107, the special figure 2 fluctuates for a predetermined time, and is released twice in the result mode of all stop symbols. I do.
When opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation (converted to the second state) and perform the opening operation in a predetermined manner in which the closing operation is performed again after a predetermined time elapses (for example, after 400 msec elapses). It is supposed to be performed once. In the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b perform a predetermined mode of opening operation (for example, opening operation of 400 msec) twice with a closing operation of a predetermined time (for example, 1000 msec). It is like that.

Here, the number of times of opening is not limited to the above contents, and when the first start winning opening 33a, 33b is won, it may be opened once or twice, or the opening operation is performed three times or more. You may do it. The same applies when winning at the second start winning opening 34. When winning at the second starting winning opening 34, the opening operation is not limited to two times but may be performed three or more times with a predetermined probability. Good.
Note that the game ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35 passes through either the left large winning port switch 103 or the right large winning port switch 104 (see FIG. 35), and is caused by the ball flow path forming member 47. It flows into the formed spherical channel.
Specifically, the left large winning opening switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and is formed by a game ball (that is, a ball channel forming member 47) flowing into the accessory device 51. Game balls flowing into the ball flow path). Since the left big prize opening switch 103 is installed in the internal space of the variable prize winning device 35, it cannot be shown directly in FIG. It is installed in the internal space. The same applies to FIGS. 6 and 7.

The right big prize opening switch 104 is disposed in a space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable prize winning device 35, and is formed by a game ball (that is, a ball channel forming member 47) flowing into the accessory device 51. Game balls flowing into the ball flow path). Similarly, because the right big prize opening switch 104 is installed in the internal space of the variable prize winning device 35, it cannot be shown directly in FIG. It is installed in the internal space of the device 35. The same applies to FIGS. 6 and 7.
The reason why the left big prize opening switch 103 and the right big prize opening switch 104 are provided is that the variable prize winning device 35 needs to have a detection function for judging that a game ball has won. A right big prize opening switch 104 is arranged.
In addition, as will be described later, specific area switches 80a to 80d (see FIG. 35) for detecting a game ball that has passed through a specific area provided in the determination device 80 are arranged inside the variable winning device 35. However, the specific area is an area for detecting a V winning and is not a winning opening for receiving a prize ball. If the game ball flows into a specific area provided in the determination device 80 (V winning), it becomes a big hit and a special game state is entered.

  In addition, a first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 and a second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 (see FIG. 35) are arranged inside the variable winning device 35. The first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 detects a game ball that has flowed into the discharge channel of the variable winning device 35, and whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the discharge channel remains in the variable winning device 35. It has a function to detect. The second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects a game ball that has passed through a specific area provided in the determination device 80, and the game ball that has passed through the specific area remains in the variable winning device 35. It has a function of detecting whether or not there is any.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the spherical flow path forming member 47 of the variable prize winning device 35. FIG. 8A is a front perspective view of the spherical flow path forming member 47, and FIG. FIG. 8C is an exploded perspective view of the upstream member 47a of the spherical flow path forming member 47, and FIG. 8D is a spherical flow path forming member. 47 is an exploded perspective view of a downstream member 47b of 47. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the ball flow path forming member 47 is composed of an upstream member 47a and a downstream member 47b, and the game ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35 is, The accessory device 51 (specifically, the drum accessory unit 60 of the accessory device 51) passes through the flow passage formed by the upstream member 47a and then passes through the flow passage formed by the downstream member 47b. Flow into.

The ball flow path forming member 47 is provided with a measure for a thread fishing ball (a game ball with a thread attached).
Specifically, the upstream member 47a includes a front surface portion 47a1 and a rear surface portion 47a2 as shown in FIG. 8C, and the front surface portion 47a1 and the rear surface portion 47a2 are formed as shown in FIG. By combining, specifically, a left channel that guides the game ball to the left side by abutting end surfaces (hereinafter simply referred to as “end surfaces”) of the front surface portion 47a1 and the rear surface portion 47a2 facing each other. A flow path including a lower flow path that guides downward is formed. And the upstream member 47a has the 1st clearance gap 47a3 in the switching part from the said left flow path to the said lower flow path. As shown in FIG. 8C, a non-contact portion 47a21 that does not contact the end surface of the front surface portion 47a1 is provided on the end surface of the rear surface portion 47a2. The non-contact portion 47a21 is formed by denting a part of the end surface of the rear surface portion 47a2, and the first contact portion 47a3 is formed by the non-contact portion 47a21.
Further, as shown in FIG. 8D, the downstream member 47b includes a left surface portion 47b1 and a right surface portion 47b2, and as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the left surface portion 47b1 and the right surface portion 47b2 Specifically, when the end surfaces of the left surface portion 47b1 and the right surface portion 47b2 are opposed to each other (hereinafter simply referred to as “end surfaces”), the front flow path that guides the game ball to the front side And a lower channel that guides to the lower side and a right channel that guides to the right side are formed. And the downstream member 47b has the 2nd clearance gap 47b3 in the switching part from the said lower flow path to the said right flow path, as shown in FIG.8 (b). As shown in FIG. 8D, a non-contact portion 47b11 that does not contact the end surface of the right surface portion 47b2 is provided on the end surface of the left surface portion 47b1. The non-contact part 47b11 curves the tip of a part of the left surface part 47b1 (the part having the non-contact part 47b11 at the tip) so that the non-contact part 47b11 does not face the end surface of the right surface part 47b2. The non-contact surface 47b11 forms the second gap 47b3.

In this manner, the ball flow path forming member 47 has a structure in which the thread attached to the thread fishing ball is easily caught, that is, has two gaps. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to cause the thread fishing ball to flow into the accessory device 51 through the ball passage formed by the ball passage forming member 47, the yarn is caught and hardly flows into the accessory device 51. Even if an attempt is made to move the game ball up and down by operating, the thread is caught and it becomes difficult to perform the operation, so that it is possible to effectively suppress illegal acts caused by the thread fishing ball.
The number and positions of the gaps provided in the spherical flow path forming member 47 can be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the big prize opening unit 35 b of the variable prize winning device 35.
As shown in FIG. 9, the special prize opening unit 35 b includes a unit base 52, a drum accessory unit 60 that is attached to the unit base 52 from the front side of the unit base 52, and a determination device (round determination device unit) 80. And a V movable accessory unit 70 mounted on the unit base 52 from the rear surface side of the unit base 52.
The accessory device 51 arranged below the winning space 41 includes a drum accessory unit 60 and a V movable accessory unit 70.

FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the drum accessory unit 60 of the special prize opening unit 35b.
As shown in FIG. 10, the drum combination unit 60 includes a floor portion 61, a drum combination 62 disposed behind the floor portion 61, and a drum combination base disposed behind the drum combination 62. A unit 63, a left support member 64a and a right support member 64b that rotatably support the drum portion 62 and rotatably support the drum portion 61, and are disposed below the floor portion 61 and the drum portion 62. And a discharge flow path unit 65 that forms a discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35.

FIGS. 11-13 is a figure explaining operation | movement of the floor part 61 of the drum accessory unit 60. FIG. FIG. 11 is a right side view of a main part of the drum accessory unit 60, in which FIG. 11 (a) shows a normal state of the floor portion 61 and FIG. 11 (b) shows an operating state of the floor portion 61. 12A and 12B are diagrams showing a normal state of the floor portion 61, in which FIG. 12A is a top perspective view, and FIG. 12B is a top view. FIGS. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the operating state of the floor portion 61, in which FIG. 13A is a top perspective view, and FIG. 13B is a top view.
The floor portion 61 is attached to the left support member 64a and the right support member 64b so as to be rotatable about a rotation shaft 61a. As shown in FIG. 10, the rotation shaft 61 a is provided on the front end side of the floor portion 61 (on the side opposite to the drum accessory 62). The accessory 62 side is rotated so as to move up and down.
As shown in FIG. 11, a drive mechanism that rotationally drives the floor portion 61 is attached to the right support member 64b. The drive mechanism includes a floor accessory solenoid 61b1 controlled by the game control device 100, and a link member 61b2 having one end connected to the plunger 61b11 of the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 and the other end connected to the floor portion 61. Is done.

When the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is turned OFF, as shown in FIG. 11A, the plunger 61b11 of the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 protrudes and pushes down the link member 61b2. Thereby, the rear end side of the floor portion 61 moves downward, and the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball as shown in FIG.
On the other hand, when the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 11B, the plunger 61b11 of the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is pushed in, and the link member 61b2 is pulled up. As a result, the rear end side of the floor portion 61 moves upward, and the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball as shown in FIG.

  The game ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 is guided to the floor portion 61 of the drum accessory unit 60 by the ball passage formed by the ball passage forming member 47, but the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is normally OFF. In the state, since the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball guided to the floor portion 61 falls from the gap to the discharge channel. On the other hand, in the operation state in which the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is ON, the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball guided to the floor portion 61 falls Without being maintained on the floor 61 (that is, before the drum accessory 62).

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the drum accessory 62 of the drum accessory unit 60, and is a right side view of the main part of the drum accessory unit 60.
The drum accessory 62 is an accessory imitating a double-sided drum, and is attached to the left support member 64a and the right support member 64b so as to be rotatable about the rotation shaft 62a. As shown in FIG. 10, the rotation shaft 62a passes through the drum portion 62b of the drum accessory 62, and both ends of the rotation shaft 62a are connected to the left bottom portion 62c and the right bottom portion 62d that block the opening of the drum portion 62b. It protrudes. A plurality of magnets 62e (shown in FIG. 15) are built in the body portion 62b. The magnet 62e is for attracting (holding in contact with) the game ball that has come into contact with the magnet arrangement location (location where the magnet 62e is arranged) on the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 62b. .

As shown in FIG. 14, the right support member 64b is provided with a drive mechanism for driving the drum accessory 62 to rotate. The drive mechanism is attached to a drum hand motor 66 controlled by the game control device 100, a drive gear (not shown) attached to the output shaft of the drum hand motor 66, and a rotating shaft 62a of the drum hand 62. The driven gear 67c, and the first intermediate gear 67a and the second intermediate gear 67b that interlock the drive gear and the driven gear 767c.
When the drum accessory motor 66 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the right side of the gaming machine 1, the drive gear rotates counterclockwise, and the first intermediate gear 67a meshing with the drive gear rotates clockwise. The second intermediate gear 67b meshing with the first intermediate gear 67a rotates counterclockwise, and the driven gear 67c meshing with the second intermediate gear 67b rotates clockwise. That is, when the drum accessory motor 66 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right side of the gaming machine 1, the drum accessory unit 60 moves the drum accessory 62 of the gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. It is configured to rotate clockwise as viewed from the right side. Therefore, when the drum accessory motor 66 rotates counterclockwise, the drum accessory 62 rotates from the bottom to the top, and the game ball can be lifted from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the drum accessory 62.
As shown in FIG. 15, the drum portion 62b of the drum accessory 62 includes an inner drum portion 62b1 and an outer drum portion 62b2. A concave portion recessed inwardly (on the opposite side to the outer trunk portion 62b2) is formed at a position corresponding to the magnet arrangement position in the inner trunk portion 62b1. The concave portion is for accommodating the magnet 62e, and the magnet 62e is sandwiched between the inner trunk portion 62b1 and the outer trunk portion 62b2 while being accommodated in the concave portion.
A concave portion recessed inwardly (inner trunk 62b1 side) is formed at a position corresponding to the magnet arrangement position in the outer trunk 62b2. The concave portion is intended to make it easy to attract the game ball to the magnet arrangement location of the trunk portion 62b and to prevent wobbling of the game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement location of the trunk portion 62b. The game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement place is lifted from the bottom to the top by the drum accessory 62 rotating from the bottom to the top while being fitted in the concave portion.

The game ball guided to the floor portion 61 by the ball passage formed by the ball passage forming member 47 does not drop and is maintained on the floor portion 61 when the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is in an operating state. However, in this case, since the floor portion 61 is inclined downward toward the rear side (that is, the drum role 62 side), the game ball maintained on the floor portion 61 is a drum role. The body 62b of the object 62 is contacted. When the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement location of the body portion 62b, the game ball is attracted to the magnet arrangement location and lifted from the bottom to the top by the drum accessory 62 rotating from the bottom to the top. Is also guided from the floor portion 61 located on the lower side to a guide surface portion 63d1 (described later) of the guide member 63d located on the upper side of the rotating shaft 62a.
The drum portion 62b (the inner drum portion 62b1 and the outer drum portion 62b2) of the drum accessory 62 is made of a material that can transmit light. As shown in FIG. 15, an LED substrate 62f is disposed inside the drum portion 62b. It is installed. Thereby, the drum accessory 62 can perform not only a rotation effect but also a light emission effect.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the functions of the left bottom portion 62c and the right bottom portion 62d of the drum accessory 62. FIG. 16 (a) is a right side view of the drum accessory 62, and FIG. FIG. 16C is a left side view of the drum accessory 62, and FIG. 16D is an inner perspective view of the left bottom portion 62c.
As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the right bottom portion 62d has a plurality of air inlets 62d1, and each air inlet 62d1 is provided with an air inlet fin 62d2. The inlet fin 62d2 is configured to increase the efficiency of inflow of air into the inlet 62d1 when the drum accessory 62 rotates from bottom to top.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D, the left bottom portion 62c has a plurality of air outlets 62c1, and each air outlet 62c1 is provided with an air outlet fin 62c2. The outflow fins 62c2 are configured to increase the outflow efficiency of air from the outflow ports 62c1 when the drum accessory 62 rotates from bottom to top.
As a result, when the drum accessory 62 rotates from bottom to top, the air escapes from the right to the left inside the drum accessory 62, so the LED board 62f built in the drum accessory 62 is removed. Can be cooled.

FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the drum accessory base unit 63 of the drum accessory unit 60.
As shown in FIG. 17, the drum accessory base unit 63 includes a base member 63a, a back member 63b and a back discharge channel forming member 63c attached to the base member 63a from the front side of the base member 63a, and a back member. 63b, and a guide member 63d mounted from the front side of the back member 63b.
The base member 63a is formed by bending an iron plate, and a triangular hole is formed in the fold so that the base member 63a does not break along the fold due to shocking shaking or the like.
The guide member 63d includes a guide surface portion 63d1, a left standing wall portion 63d2 that rises upward from the left end of the guide surface portion 63d1, and a right standing wall portion 63d3 that stands upward from the right end of the guide surface portion 63d1. doing. The guide surface portion 63d1 is inclined downward toward the rear side, and a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball is provided between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b.

FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the V movable accessory unit 70 of the special prize opening unit 35b.
As shown in FIG. 18, the V movable accessory unit 70 includes a V movable accessory base 71, a motor cover 72 attached to the V movable accessory base 71 from the front side of the V movable accessory base 71, and a motor. A V movable accessory motor 73 attached to the cover 72 from the front side of the motor cover 72, a drive gear 74 and a rack 75 attached to the V movable accessory base 71 from the front side of the V movable accessory base 71, The slide member 76 is mounted on the rack 75 from the front side of the rack 75, and the V movable member 77 is mounted on the slide member 76 from the front side of the slide member 76.
The V movable accessory unit 70 is configured to slide the V movable member 77 in the left-right direction.

The V movable accessory base 71 is provided with a guide hole 71a along the left-right direction. The guide hole 71a guides the sliding movement of the rack 75 and defines the sliding range of the rack 75. A protrusion 75a is provided on the rear surface side of the rack 75, and the rack 75 is attached to the V movable accessory base 71 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with the protrusion 75a being inserted into the guide hole 71a. It has been.
The slide member 76 includes a fixed portion 76a fixed to the V movable accessory base 71 and a slide portion that is slidably attached along the longitudinal direction of the fixed portion 76a to the fixed portion 76a that is long in the left-right direction. 76b. A V movable member 77 is fixed to the front surface side of the slide portion 76b, and a rack 75 is fixed to the rear surface side of the slide portion 76b.
A drive mechanism for sliding the V movable member 77 (specifically, the slide portion 76b and the V movable member 77 fixed to the slide portion 76b) is a V movable accessory motor 73 controlled by the game control device 100. And a drive gear 74 attached to the output shaft of the V movable accessory motor 73 and a rack 75 meshing with the drive gear 74.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the drum combination base unit 63 of the drum combination unit 60 and the V movable member 77 of the V movable combination unit 70. FIG. FIG. 19B is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the guide member 63d of the object base unit 63 and the V movable member 77, and FIG. 19B shows the back member 63b of the drum accessory base unit 63, the V movable member 77, It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of these.
As shown in FIG. 19B, the V movable member 77 is disposed in front of the back member 63b of the drum accessory base unit 63, and the slide portion 76b of the slide member 76 is the base of the drum accessory base unit 63. It is arranged behind the member 63a.
As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the lower end portion of the V movable member 77 of the V movable accessory unit 70 is a game ball housing portion 77a having an open front surface, and the game ball housing portion 77a is a guide surface portion. It is disposed between 63d1 and the back member 63b.

The guide surface portion 63d1 is inclined downward toward the rear side, and a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball is provided between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b. Therefore, the game ball lifted by the drum accessory 62 and guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 of the guide member 63d is stored in the game ball storage portion 77a of the V movable member 77, or the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member. It falls from the gap with 63b. The game ball dropped from the gap flows into the discharge channel in the variable winning device 35 through the back surface discharge channel formed by the back surface discharge channel forming member 63c.
The V movable member 77 includes a discharge flow path guiding position where the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is located on the left side of the left standing wall 63d2 of the guiding member 63d of the drum accessory base unit 63, and the V The game ball housing portion 77a of the movable member 77 is configured to be slidable between a determining device guide position located on the right side of the right standing wall portion 63d3 of the guide member 63d of the drum accessory base unit 63. .

20 to 23 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the V movable member 77 of the V movable accessory unit 70. 20 is a diagram showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the initial position, and FIG. 20A is a front view of the drum accessory unit 60 and the V movable accessory unit 70, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a top perspective view of the drum accessory unit 60 and the V movable accessory unit 70. FIG. 21A is a diagram showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the discharge flow path guiding position, and FIG. 21B is a diagram showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the left normal operation position. FIG. 22A is a diagram showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the right normal operation position, and FIG. 22B is a diagram showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is in the determining device guiding position. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a principal part showing a state in which the V movable member 77 is at the discharge channel guiding position.
As shown in FIG. 20, when the V movable member 77 is in the initial position, the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is formed between the left standing wall 63d2 and the right standing wall 63d3 of the guide member 63d. It is located approximately in the middle (specifically, slightly to the right of the middle between the left standing wall 63d2 and the right standing wall 63d3).

As shown in FIG. 21A, when the V movable member 77 is at the discharge flow path guiding position, the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is more than the left standing wall 63d2 of the guiding member 63d. Located on the left side.
As shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the V movable member 77 is in the left normal operation position, the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77 and the left standing wall 63d2 of the guide member 63d and the right standing It is located on the leftmost side between the wall 63d3.
As shown in FIG. 22A, when the V-movable member 77 is in the right normal operation position, the game ball housing portion 77a of the V-movable member 77 and the left standing wall 63d2 of the guide member 63d are raised to the right. It is located on the rightmost side between the wall 63d3.
As shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the V movable member 77 is in the determining device guiding position, the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the right standing wall 63d3 of the guiding member 63d. Located in.

While the V movable member 77 moves between the left normal operation position and the right normal operation position, the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is formed between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b of the guide member 63d. Located in the gap. Therefore, while the V movable member 77 moves between the left normal operation position and the right normal operation position, the game surface is stored (the game ball is stored in the game ball storage portion 77a) by the guide surface portion 63d1. State) is maintained.
On the other hand, when the V movable member 77 reaches the discharge flow path guiding position, there is no one (guidance surface portion 63d1) that maintains the game ball housing state in front of the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77, so The game ball stored in the portion 77a falls from the game ball storage portion 77a.
As shown in FIG. 23, the back discharge channel forming member 63c is provided with a protruding piece 63c1 protruding toward the front side, and since this protruding piece 63c1 is inclined downward toward the rear side, When the V-movable member 77 is at the discharge channel guiding position, the game ball dropped from the game ball housing portion 77a is discharged to the back surface by the drum portion 62b of the drum accessory 62 and the protruding piece 63c1 of the back discharge channel forming member 63c. It is guided to the rear discharge flow path formed by the flow path forming member 63c. The game ball guided to the back discharge flow path flows into the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35 through the back discharge flow path.
It is also possible to take measures against the fishing ball on the rear discharge flow path forming member 63c, such as providing a cutout in the protruding piece 63c1 or providing a cutout at the discharge port to the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35.

Further, even when the V movable member 77 reaches the determining device guiding position, there is no game ball containing state (guide surface portion 63d1) in front of the game ball containing portion 77a of the V movable member 77, so that the game ball A game ball stored in the storage unit 77a falls from the game ball storage unit 77a. Then, when the V movable member 77 is in the determining device guiding position, the game ball that has dropped from the game ball housing portion 77a flows into the determining device 80.
The back member 63b of the drum accessory base unit 63 incorporates a first V effect switch 63b1 for detecting that a game ball flows into the determination device 80.

FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement position of the first V effect switch 63b1. In FIG. 24, illustration of a part of the back member 63b (specifically, a member that hides the first V effect switch 63b1) is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 24, the first V effect switch 63b1 is built in the rear member 63b at a position behind the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77 at the determining device guiding position. The first V effect switch 63b1 is configured to be able to detect a game ball, and that the game ball is positioned in front of the first V effect switch 63b1 (that is, the game ball of the V movable member 77 that has reached the determination device guide position). It is detected that the game ball flows into the determination device 80 by detecting that the game ball is stored in the storage unit 77a. When it is detected that the game ball flows into the determining device 80, a predetermined effect (for example, a round lottery effect) is executed.

25 and 26 are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the discharge flow path unit 65 of the drum accessory unit 60, in which FIG. 25 (a) is a top view and FIG. 25 (b) is a left side view. 26 (a) is a bottom view, and FIG. 26 (b) is a bottom perspective view.
A game ball dropped from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back surface member 63b, or a game ball dropped from the game ball housing portion 77a when the V movable member 77 is at the discharge flow path guide position, is a back surface discharge flow path forming member 63c. It flows into the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35, that is, the discharge flow path formed by the discharge flow path unit 65 through the rear discharge flow path formed by the above.
As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a protective member 65 a is attached to the outlet of the discharge channel formed by the discharge channel unit 65.

As shown in FIG. 26, the protective member 65a is provided with a measure for fishing line. Specifically, the protection member 65a is provided with a plurality of protrusions 65a1 protruding from the front end to the rear end side of the outlet of the discharge flow path formed by the discharge flow path unit 65. Comb-shaped irregularities are formed at the front end of the outlet.
As described above, the protective member 65a has a plurality of protrusions 65a1 and has a structure in which the thread attached to the thread fishing ball is easily caught. Accordingly, even if it is attempted to pull up the game ball that has passed through the outlet of the discharge channel by operating the thread, it becomes difficult to perform the operation due to the thread being caught, so that illegal acts by the thread fishing ball can be effectively suppressed. .
Further, as shown in FIGS. 25B and 26B, the front end portion of the protection member 65a, that is, the lower surface of the portion provided with the plurality of protrusions 65a1, is inclined upward toward the front side. Thereby, when it is going to pull up the game ball by operating the thread, the thread is easily caught between the protrusions 65a1.

FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the determination device 80 of the special prize opening unit 35b. FIG. 28A is a front perspective view of the determining device 80, and FIG. 28B is a front perspective view of the main part of the determining device 80.
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the determining device 80 includes a horizontal base member 81, a horizontal movable member 82 mounted on the horizontal base member 81, and a vertical base member mounted on the rear end of the horizontal base member 81. 86, an inflow port forming member 83 attached to the vertical base member 86 from the front side of the vertical base member 86, a cover member 84, a vertical movable member 85, a decorative member 48b, and the vertical base member 86 to the vertical base member. 86. The left switch cover 87a and the right switch cover 87b attached from the rear surface side of the 86, and a drive mechanism that rotationally drives the horizontal movable member 82 and the vertical movable member 85 are configured.

The horizontal movable member 82 is attached to the horizontal base member 81 so as to be rotatable about a rotation shaft 82a that is substantially along the vertical direction.
The vertical movable member 85 is attached to the vertical base member 86 so as to be rotatable about a rotation shaft 85a that is substantially along the front-rear direction.
A driving mechanism for rotationally driving the horizontal movable member 82 and the vertical movable member 85 includes a round lottery accessory motor 88 controlled by the game control device 100, and a drive gear 89a attached to the output shaft of the round lottery accessory motor 88. The vertical driven gear 89c attached to the rotary shaft 85a of the vertical movable member 85, the vertical intermediate gear 89b that links the drive gear 89a and the vertical driven gear 89c, and the rotary shaft 82a of the horizontal movable member 82. The horizontal driven gear 89j and the first horizontal intermediate gear 89d to the sixth horizontal intermediate gear 89i that link the drive gear 89a and the horizontal driven gear 89j are configured.

  When the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1, the drive gear 89a rotates counterclockwise, and the vertical intermediate gear 89b meshing with the drive gear 89a rotates clockwise. The vertical driven gear 89c that meshes with the vertical intermediate gear 89b rotates counterclockwise, and the horizontal first intermediate gear 89d that meshes with the drive gear 89a and the horizontal first intermediate gear 89d and the rotation shaft And the second horizontal gear 89e for horizontal rotation with the same rotation. Then, when viewed from the upper surface side of the gaming machine 1, the horizontal third intermediate gear 89f meshed with the horizontal second intermediate gear 89e and the horizontal fourth intermediate gear 89f having the same rotation axis as the horizontal third intermediate gear 89f. The intermediate gear 89g is counterclockwise, the horizontal fifth intermediate gear 89h meshing with the horizontal fourth intermediate gear 89g is clockwise, and the horizontal sixth intermediate gear 89i meshing with the horizontal fifth intermediate gear 89h. Counterclockwise, the horizontal driven gear 89j meshing with the sixth horizontal intermediate gear 89i rotates clockwise. Therefore, when the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the determination device 80 rotates the horizontal movable member 82 clockwise and counteracts the vertical movable member 85 counterclockwise as shown in FIG. It is configured to rotate clockwise. In this way, the drive mechanism is configured so that two movable members (horizontal movable member 82 and vertical movable member 85) can be simultaneously rotated in different directions by a single drive source (round lottery accessory motor 88). ing.

FIG. 29A is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the horizontal movable member 82 of the determination device 80, and FIG. 29B is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the horizontal base member 81 of the determination device 80.
The horizontal movable member 82 has a disk shape. As shown in FIG. 29A, the horizontal movable member 82 is formed with a first V winning guiding portion 82b1, a second V winning guiding portion 82b2, and a third V winning guiding portion 82b3 into which game balls can flow.
As shown in FIG. 29B, the horizontal base member 81 includes a first specific area switch 80a for detecting that the game ball has passed the first specific area, and the game ball has passed the second specific area. A second specific area switch 80b that detects that the game has been performed and a third specific area switch 80c that detects that the game ball has passed through the third specific area are provided. Of the three types of specific regions provided in the horizontal base member 81, the third specific region is closest to the rotation shaft 82a of the horizontal movable member 82, and is the farthest from the rotation shaft 82a of the horizontal movable member 82. The first specific area.

When the V movable member 77 is in the determining device guiding position, the game ball that has dropped from the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77 passes through the inlet formed by the inlet forming member 83, and then the horizontal base member. It falls to the flow path 81b provided in 81, flows down from the rear side to the front side along the flow path 81b, and reaches the guide surface 81b1 formed in the flow path 81b. Then, the game ball that has reached the guide surface 81b1 flows into any one of the plurality of V winning guiding portions formed on the horizontal movable member 82.
Of the three types of V winning guiding portions formed on the horizontal movable member 82, the gaming ball that has flowed into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 is guided to the first specific area and has flowed into the second V winning guiding portion 82b2. Is guided to the second specific area, and the game ball that has flowed into the third V prize guiding section 82b3 is guided to the third specific area.

Each of the three types of V winning guides provided on the horizontal base member 81 is formed by denting a part of the outer peripheral surface of the horizontal movable member 82 toward the rotation center of the horizontal movable member 82.
The third V winning guiding portion 82b3 has a bottom surface that is inclined downward toward the rotation center side of the horizontal movable member 82, and a hole portion 82b31 through which a game ball can pass is formed on the bottom surface. The hole 82b31 is provided at a position that passes over the third specific area but does not pass over the second specific area when the horizontal movable member 82 rotates. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the third V winning guiding portion 82b3 rolls toward the hole portion 82b31 and flows from the hole portion 82b31 into the third specific region.
The second V prize guiding portion 82b2 has a bottom surface that is inclined downward toward the rotation center side of the horizontal movable member 82, and a hole portion 82b21 through which a game ball can pass is formed on the bottom surface. . The hole 82b21 is provided at a position that passes over the second specific area but does not pass over the third specific area when the horizontal movable member 82 rotates. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the second V winning guiding portion 82b2 rolls toward the hole portion 82b21 and flows from the hole portion 82b21 into the second specific area.

When the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the horizontal movable member 82 rotates clockwise as viewed from the upper surface side. The guide surface 81b1 is at the 6 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82, the third specific area is at the 9 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82, the second specific area is at the 11 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82, One specific region is provided at a position between 1 o'clock and 2 o'clock in the horizontal movable member 82. Therefore, when the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the game ball that has flowed into the third V winning guiding portion 82b3 moves to the third specific area without passing through the 12 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82. The game ball that has fallen and has flowed into the second V winning guiding portion 82b2 falls into the second specific area without passing through the 12 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82. That is, when the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the game balls that have flown into the third V winning guiding portion 82b3 and the second V winning guiding portion 82b2 are configured not to flow into the first specific area. .
On the other hand, the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 does not have a bottom surface and is provided at a position where neither the third specific area nor the second specific area passes when the horizontal movable member 82 rotates. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 is guided to the first specific area without flowing into the second specific area and the third specific area.

In the present embodiment, the second specific area and the third specific area are provided in a portion of the horizontal base member 81 that faces the horizontal movable member 82, and the first specific area is the horizontal base member 81. Of these, it is provided outside the portion facing the horizontal movable member 82, but the place where the specific region is provided can be changed as appropriate. For example, the first specific region is also provided within the portion facing the horizontal movable member 82. May be.
In the present embodiment, the horizontal movable member 82 is formed with four first V prize guiding parts 82b1, three second V prize guiding parts 82b2, and one third V prize guiding part 82b3. Are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction of the horizontal movable member 82. However, the number and arrangement order of the V prize guiding portions can be appropriately changed.

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the vertical movable member 85 of the determining device 80. FIG. 30 (a) is a front view in a state where the vertical base member 86 is mounted, and FIG. It is a front view in the state where the front cover of vertical movable member 85 was removed.
The vertical movable member 85 has a disk shape, and a plurality of magnets 85b are built in the vertical movable member 85 as shown in FIG. The magnet 85b is for attracting (holding in contact with) the game ball that has come into contact with the magnet placement location (location where the magnet 85b is placed) on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical movable member 85 to the magnet placement location. is there.
When the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the horizontal movable member 82 rotates clockwise as viewed from the upper surface side. Since the guide surface 81b1 is provided at the 6 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82 and the first specific area is provided at a position between 1 o'clock and 2 o'clock on the horizontal movable member 82, the round lottery accessory motor 88 is provided. Is rotated counterclockwise, the game ball that has flowed into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 is positioned at the 12 o'clock position of the horizontal movable member 82, that is, the vertical movable member 85 before being guided to the first specific area. Pass below. Therefore, when the game ball that has flowed into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 reaches the 12 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82, any of the magnet arrangement positions of the vertical movable member 85 is the 6 o'clock position on the vertical movable member 85. When reaching, the game ball is attracted to the magnet arrangement position that has reached the 6 o'clock position in the vertical movable member 85. In addition, when the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the vertical movable member 85 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side, so that the vertical movable member 85 is located at the magnet arrangement position of the vertical movable member 85. The sucked game ball can be lifted from the bottom to the top and guided to a fourth V winning guiding portion 86a provided at the 9 o'clock position on the vertical movable member 85. The game ball guided to the fourth V winning guiding portion 86a flows into a fourth specific area provided behind the fourth V winning guiding portion 86a.

As shown in FIG. 30 (b), a recess 85 c that is recessed inwardly (at the rotational center side of the vertical movable member 85) is formed at least on the magnet placement portion of the outer peripheral surface of the vertical movable member 85. The concave portion 85c is for facilitating the adsorption of the game ball to the magnet arrangement location of the vertical movable member 85, and for suppressing the wobbling of the game ball adsorbed to the magnet arrangement location of the vertical movable member 85. The game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement position of the movable member 85 is lifted from the bottom to the top by the vertical movable member 85 that rotates counterclockwise while being fitted in the concave portion 85c.
Further, since the horizontal movable member 82 and the vertical movable member 85 rotate in different directions, a game ball that has reached the 12 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82 and a magnet that has reached the 6 o'clock position on the vertical movable member 85. The arrangement location moves in the same direction (when the round lottery accessory motor 88 rotates counterclockwise, the right direction). Therefore, the vertical movable member 85 can smoothly lift the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 27, a second V effect switch 87b1 for detecting that the game ball is lifted by the vertical movable member 85 is attached to the right switch cover 87b mounted on the rear surface side of the vertical base member 86. . The second V effect switch 87b1 is configured to be able to detect a game ball, and that the game ball is positioned in front of the second V effect switch 87b1 (specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, in the vertical movable member 85). By detecting that the game ball has reached the 3 o'clock position), it is detected that the game ball has been lifted by the vertical movable member 85. When it is detected that the game ball is lifted by the vertical movable member 85, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect suggesting a V winning in a more advantageous specific area) is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball flows into the first specific area (V winning), “per 5 rounds (per 5R)” or “larger 16 rounds (16R big hit)” occurs. In the case of inflow into the second specific area (V prize), “per 8 rounds (per 8R)” or “big hit of 16 rounds (16R big hit)” occurs, and inflow into the third specific area (V prize) “16 round big hit (16R big hit)” occurs, and when it flows into the fourth specific area (V winning), “16 round big hit (16R big hit)” occurs. That is, the determination device 80 functions as a round lottery item for determining the number of rounds for the big hit. When the game ball flows into the first specific area, the second specific area, and the third specific area, the special winning opening is opened in an “opening / closing” manner (see FIG. 78B), and the fourth When it flows into the specific area, the special winning opening is opened in a “long open” mode (see FIG. 78B) which is more advantageous to the player than the “open / close” mode.
As described above, when the game ball flows into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1, there is a possibility that “per 5R” may occur. However, after the gaming ball flows into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1, the vertical movable member 85 is generated. Is lifted, “16R big hit” is confirmed. That is, even when the game ball flows into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1, there are cases where the V winning is made in the fourth specific area which is more advantageous than the first specific area. Therefore, when the game ball flows into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1, the player determines whether or not the game ball is lifted and promoted by the vertical movable member 85, that is, the first specific area (the most unfavorable big hit for the player). It can be enjoyed whether it flows into the specific area corresponding to the state) or the fourth specific area (the specific area corresponding to the jackpot state that is most advantageous for the player).

As shown in FIG. 27, a fourth specific area switch 80d for detecting that a game ball has passed through the fourth specific area is attached to the left switch cover 87a mounted on the rear surface side of the vertical base member 86. ing. As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 30A, the vertical base member 86 has a fourth V winning guiding portion 86a at 9 o'clock in the vertical movable member 85, and is lifted by the vertical movable member 85. The game ball that has passed through the fourth winning guidance portion 86a flows into the fourth specific area.
For example, when trouble such as the magnetic force of the magnet 85b weakens, the game ball adsorbed to the magnet arrangement position of the vertical movable member 85 is at the 9 o'clock position on the vertical movable member 85 (that is, the fourth winning guiding portion 86a). Before reaching the position, the magnet may be separated from the location of the magnet. When the game ball has moved away from the vertical movable member 85, the game ball flows into the fourth specific area or flows into the first specific area depending on the position away from the vertical movable member 85.

In the present embodiment, the magnet 85b is invisible from the outside of the vertical movable member 85. In addition, as shown in FIG. 30B, a recess 85c is also provided in a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the vertical movable member 85 other than the magnet arrangement location. Accordingly, since the player does not know where the magnet is arranged, if the game ball flows into the first V winning induction portion 82b1, whether or not the game ball is lifted and promoted by the vertical movable member 85, that is, the first It can be enjoyed whether it flows into one specific area or the fourth specific area.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30B, the plurality of magnets 85b are regularly arranged in the circumferential direction of the vertical movable member 85, but may be arranged at random.

Next, the flow of game balls in the variable winning device 35 will be described.
When the left and right movable members 43 a and 43 b of the variable winning device 35 are opened and the game ball flows into the winning space 41, the game ball is moved to the floor portion 61 by the ball channel formed by the ball channel forming member 47. Be guided. And if the said game ball contacts the magnet arrangement | positioning location of the drum role 62 before the clearance gap between the floor part 61 and the drum role 62 becomes larger than the diameter of a game ball, the said game ball will become constant speed | rate. It is lifted by the rotating drum accessory 62 and guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 of the guide member 63d. On the other hand, if the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball before the game ball contacts the magnet arrangement position of the drum accessory 62, the game ball is removed from the gap. It falls and is discharged to the outside through the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35.
The game ball guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 of the guide member 63d is stored in the game ball storage portion 77a of the V movable member 77, or falls from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b. When the game ball falls from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b, the game ball is discharged to the outside through the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77, the game ball is removed from the V movable member 77 when the V movable member 77 arrives at the determining device guiding position. It falls and flows into the determination device 80.

The game ball that has flowed into the determining device 80 is placed in any one of the first V winning guiding portion 82b1, the second V winning guiding portion 82b2, and the third V winning guiding portion 82b3 formed on the horizontal movable member 82 rotating at a constant speed. Inflow. When the game ball flows into the third V winning guiding portion 82b3, the game ball flows into the third specific area (V winning), and thus a “16R big hit” occurs. In addition, when the game ball flows into the second V winning guiding portion 82b2, the game ball flows into the second specific area (V winning), so that “per 8R” or “16R big hit” occurs. In addition, when the game ball flows into the first V prize guiding portion 82b1, the game ball flows into the first specific area (V prize), and therefore, “per 5R” or “16R big hit” occurs.
However, even when the game ball flows into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1, the timing at which the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 arrives at the 12 o'clock position in the horizontal movable member 82 and the magnet of the vertical movable member 85 When the timing at which one of the arrangement locations arrives at the 6 o'clock position on the vertical movable member 85 is substantially the same, the game ball is rotating at a constant speed because it contacts the magnet arrangement location. It is lifted by the vertical movable member 85. Then, when the game ball flows into the fourth specific area 86a as a result of being lifted by the vertical movable member 85, the game ball flows into the fourth specific area (V winning), and thus “16R big hit” occurs.

<Initialization operation>
FIG. 31 is a timing chart for explaining the initializing operation of the accessory. FIG. 31A shows the initializing operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), and FIG. The initialization operation of the drum combination 62 is shown, and FIG. 31 (c) shows the initialization operation of the round lottery combination (determination device 80).
In the initialization operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), the game control apparatus 100 maintains the OFF state (stopped state) of the floor accessory solenoid 61b1, so the floor portion 61 does not operate.

First, the initialization operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) will be described.
The V movable accessory motor 73 is a step type motor. As shown in FIG. 31 (a), in the clockwise rotation (CW rotation), the motor rotates at a speed of 4 milliseconds per step, and the counterclockwise rotation (CCW) In the same manner, the rotation is performed at a speed of 4 milliseconds per step.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, a V movable accessory motor switch 73 a for detecting the position of the V movable member 77 is attached to the motor cover 72 of the V movable accessory unit 70. The V movable accessory motor switch 73a includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion that face each other, and a light shielding portion (not shown) is provided on the slide portion 76b of the slide member 76. The V movable accessory motor switch 73a detects the position of the V movable member 77 by detecting, in the light receiving portion, the light shielding state where the light from the light emitting portion is blocked by the light blocking portion and the light passing state where the light is not blocked. It is possible. The method for detecting the position of the V movable member 77 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game control device 100 rotates the V movable accessory motor 73 counterclockwise to move the V movable member 77 to the left. Move the slide. Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter a light-transmitting state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after the light-transmitting state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), The rotation of the movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and put on standby.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 is slid to the right. Let Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to be in a light shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after reaching the light shielding state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 400), that is, V movable. When the member 77 arrives at the round position determining device guiding position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waited.

Next, process A is performed. Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated counterclockwise to move the V movable member 77 to the left. Slide to the right. When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and when a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) elapses, the V movable accessory. The motor 73 is rotated clockwise to slide the V movable member 77 to the right. When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waited.
Next, the process A is performed again.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated counterclockwise and the V movable member 77 is slid to the left. Move. Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter a light-transmitting state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after the light-transmitting state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 356), When the V movable member 77 arrives at the discharge flow path guiding position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waited.

Next, process B is performed. Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise to move the V movable member 77 to the right. And slide it. When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and when a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) elapses, the V movable accessory. The motor 73 is rotated counterclockwise, and the V movable member 77 is slid to the left. When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waited.
Next, the process B is performed again.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise to slide the V movable member 77 to the right. Let Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to be in a light shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after reaching the light shielding state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), that is, V movable. When the member 77 arrives at the initial position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and the initialization operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) has elapsed.

Next, the initialization operation of the drum accessory 62 will be described.
The drum accessory motor 66 is a step type motor, and as shown in FIG. 31 (b), in the clockwise rotation (CW rotation), it rotates at a speed of 4 milliseconds per step, and counterclockwise rotation (CCW rotation). In the same way, it rotates at a speed of 4 milliseconds per step.
Also, a drum combination motor switch 66a (see FIG. 35) for detecting the position of the drum combination 62 is attached to any one of the members constituting the drum combination unit 60 (for example, the right support member 64b). ing. The drum accessory motor switch 66a includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion that face each other, and a light shielding portion (not shown) is provided on any one of the members constituting the drum accessory unit 60 (for example, the right bottom portion 62d). ing. The drum accessory motor switch 66a can detect the position of the drum accessory 62 by detecting, in the light receiving portion, a light shielding state where light from the light emitting portion is blocked by the light shielding portion and a light passing state where light is not blocked by the light shielding portion. It has become. Note that the method for detecting the position of the drum accessory 62 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game control device 100 causes the drum accessory 62 to rotate from bottom to top (that is, the rotation shown in FIG. 14). The drum accessory motor 66 is rotated counterclockwise. Then, when the number of rotation steps of the drum accessory motor 66 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2326), that is, when the drum accessory 62 rotates once, it waits for the drum accessory motor switch 66a to be in a light shielding state.

The drum accessory motor switch 66a waits for the light shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the drum accessory motor 66 after the light shielding state reaches the predetermined number (for example, 300), that is, the drum accessory motor switch 66a. When the drum accessory 62 rotates to the point where the light transmission state is guaranteed, it waits for the drum accessory motor switch 66a to be in the light-shielding state.
When the drum accessory motor switch 66a enters a light-shielded state, the rotation of the drum accessory motor 66 is stopped, and the initialization operation of the drum accessory 62 ends after a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) has elapsed.

Next, the initialization operation of the round lottery item (determination device 80) will be described.
The round lottery accessory motor 88 is a step type motor, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), in the clockwise rotation (CW rotation), it rotates at a speed of 4 milliseconds per step, and the counterclockwise rotation (CCW). In the same manner, the rotation is performed at a speed of 4 milliseconds per step.
As shown in FIG. 27, a round lottery accessory motor switch 88a for detecting the position of the horizontal movable member 82 is attached to the horizontal base member 81 of the determining device 80. The round lottery accessory motor switch 88a includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion that face each other, and the horizontal movable member 82 is provided with a light shielding portion (not shown). The round lottery accessory motor switch 88a detects the position of the horizontal movable member 82 by detecting, in the light receiving portion, the light shielding state where the light from the light emitting portion is blocked by the light blocking portion and the light passing state where the light is not blocked. It is possible. The method for detecting the position of the horizontal movable member 82 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. In addition to or instead of the horizontal movable member 82, the position of the vertical movable member 85 can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game control device 100 causes the horizontal movable member 82 to rotate clockwise (rotation shown in FIG. 28) and the vertical movable accessory. The round lottery accessory motor 88 is rotated counterclockwise so that 85 rotates counterclockwise (rotation shown in FIG. 28). When the number of rotation steps of the round lottery accessory motor 88 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4400), that is, for a predetermined time (specifically, the time for the V movable member 77 to move to the round position determining device guide position) (When the movable member 77 is in the determining device guide position, the sum of the time until the game ball dropped from the game ball housing portion 77a gets on the horizontal movable accessory 85 and the time required for the horizontal movable accessory 85 to rotate twice) When elapses, it waits for the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a to be in a light shielding state.

Waiting for the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a to be in the light-shielded state, and when the number of rotation steps of the round lottery accessory motor 88 after reaching the light-shielded state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150), that is, the round lottery accessory When the horizontal movable member 82 rotates until the light passing state of the motor switch 88a is ensured, it waits for the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a to be in a light shielding state.
When the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a is in a light-shielded state, the rotation of the round lottery accessory motor 88 is stopped, and the initialization operation of the round lottery accessory (determination device 80) is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds). Exit.

<Normal operation>
When the initialization operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the initialization operation of the drum accessory 62, and the initialization operation of the round lottery accessory (decision device 80) are all completed, the routine proceeds to a normal operation.
In the normal operation of the drum accessory 62, the game control device 100 rotates the drum accessory motor 66 counterclockwise, and when the number of rotation steps reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300), that is, the drum accessory motor switch 66a is turned on. When the drum accessory 62 rotates to the point where the light transmission state is guaranteed, the process of waiting for the drum accessory motor switch 66a to enter a light-shielding state is repeated. That is, in the normal operation of the drum accessory 62, the drum accessory motor 66 is always rotating counterclockwise.
Further, in the normal operation of the round lottery item (decision device 80), the game control device 100 rotates the round lottery item motor 88 counterclockwise, and when the number of rotation steps reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150), That is, when the horizontal movable member 82 rotates until the light passing state of the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a is ensured, the process of waiting for the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a to enter a light-shielding state is repeated. In other words, in the normal operation of the round lottery item (decision device 80), the round lottery item motor 88 is always rotating counterclockwise.
In the normal operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the V movable accessory motor 73 is in the OFF state, and the V movable member 77 does not operate.
Further, in the normal operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is in the OFF state, and the floor portion 61 does not operate.

<Small hit operation>
FIG. 32 is a timing chart for explaining the small hitting operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77). FIG. 32 (a) shows the small hitting initial operation, and FIG. 32 (b) shows the small hitting operation. Indicates normal operation.
In the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), a game ball wins a start winning opening 33a, 33b, 34, and a large winning opening is opened (movable members 43a, 43b of the variable winning apparatus 35 of the variable winning apparatus 35 are opened). ) When the start timing comes, a small hit operation is performed. In this small hitting operation, the small hitting initial operation (the operation shown in FIG. 32A) is performed once, and then the small hitting normal operation (the operation shown in FIG. 32B) is performed in the variable winning device 35. Repeat until there is no sphere.
As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when it is the start timing of the big winning opening at the small hit, the game control device 100 rotates the V movable accessory motor 73 counterclockwise and waits at the initial position. The V movable member 77 is slid to the left. When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 366), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the discharge flow path guiding position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped. Wait. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V movable member 77 is first moved to the discharge flow path guiding position at the start timing of opening the large winning opening at the small hit. As a result, when a game ball remains in the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77, the game ball can be dropped from the game ball housing portion 77a. It is possible to prevent the act of illegally storing the game ball in the game ball storage portion 77a before.

  Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 500 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise to slide the V movable member 77 to the right. Let Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to be in a light shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after reaching the light shielding state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), that is, V movable. When the member 77 arrives at the initial position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waited.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 1900 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise to slide the V movable member 77 to the right. Let When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 390), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the determining device guide position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waited. Let
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 500 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated counterclockwise as shown in FIG. The V movable member 77 is slid to the left. When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 155), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the right normal operation position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waits. Let

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated counterclockwise and the V movable member 77 is slid to the left. Move. When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 235), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives “near the initial position”, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped. Wait. Here, “near the initial position” means a position slightly to the left of the initial position, that is, the game ball housing portion 77a of the V movable member 77 is the central portion (the central portion in the left-right direction) of the drum portion 62b of the drum accessory 62. ). As shown in FIG. 20B and the like, the body portion 62b is provided with three magnet arrangement locations arranged along the left-right direction and two magnet arrangement locations arranged along the left-right direction. Among the three magnet arrangement locations arranged along the direction, the magnet arrangement location in the middle is located at the central portion (the central portion in the left-right direction) of the trunk portion 62b. Therefore, “near the initial position” is a position where the game ball housing portion 77a can face the middle magnet arrangement position among the three magnet arrangement positions arranged in the left-right direction.
The game ball lifted by the drum accessory 62 and guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 of the guide member 63d is stored in the game ball storage portion 77a of the V movable member 77, or the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b. In this way, by waiting in “near the initial position”, the probability that the game ball is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a, that is, the probability of becoming a V prize is increased.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated counterclockwise and the V movable member 77 is slid to the left. Move. Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter the light-transmitting state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after the light-transmitting state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 214), that is, When the V movable member 77 arrives at the left normal operation position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waited.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 is slid to the right. Let Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to be in a light shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after reaching the light shielding state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), that is, V movable. When the member 77 arrives at the initial position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waited.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise to slide the V movable member 77 to the right. Let When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 235), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the right normal operation position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waits. Let
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 is slid to the right. Let When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 155), that is, when the V movable member 77 arrives at the determining device guiding position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, Wait for a predetermined time (for example, 500 milliseconds).

Thus, the V movable member 77 moves between the discharge flow path guiding position and the determining device guiding position in the small hitting initial operation (see FIG. 32A), but in the small hitting normal operation (FIG. 32). In (b), it moves between the left normal operation position and the determination device guide position. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally storing the game ball in the game ball storage portion 77a before the start of the large winning opening at the small hit.
In the small hitting operation of the drum accessory 62, the game control device 100 continues the counterclockwise rotation of the drum accessory motor 66. That is, the drum accessory 62 continues normal operation.
Further, in the small hitting operation of the round lottery item (decision device 80), the game control device 100 continues the counterclockwise rotation of the round lottery item motor 88. That is, the determination device 80 continues normal operation.
Further, in the small hitting operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), the game control device 100 causes the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 to shift alternately between the OFF state and the ON state. That is, the floor 61 performs a reciprocating motion that rotates so that the rear end side of the floor 61 moves up and down.

<Big hit action>
FIG. 33 is a timing chart for explaining the big hit operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77). FIG. 33 (a) shows a round operation, and FIG. 33 (b) shows an ending operation.
When a big hit occurs, the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) performs a big hit operation. In this jackpot operation, the round performance (the operation shown in FIG. 33A) is repeated at the round production start timing (that is, the start timing of the big prize opening at the jackpot), and then the ending presentation start timing ( That is, when the last round of remaining spheres is discharged), the ending operation (the operation shown in FIG. 33B) is performed once. The operation (sliding movement) of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is stopped during the period from the occurrence of the big hit until the start timing for opening the big prize opening (that is, during the fanfare period).

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the round effect start timing comes, the game control device 100 rotates the V movable accessory motor 73 counterclockwise after a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) has elapsed, The V movable member 77 standing by is slid to the left. Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter a light-transmitting state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after the light-transmitting state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 356), When the V movable member 77 reaches the discharge flow path guiding position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and waited.
Next, the process B described above is performed twice.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 5000 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise to slide the V movable member 77 to the right. Let Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to be in a light shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after reaching the light shielding state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), that is, V movable. When the member 77 arrives at the initial position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the round operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is finished, and if the ending effect start timing is not reached, Regardless of whether or not there is a game ball in the winning opening, the round operation is performed again.

As shown in FIG. 33 (b), at the ending effect start timing, the game control device 100 rotates the V movable accessory motor 73 counterclockwise after a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) has elapsed, thereby moving the V movable. The member 77 is slid to the left. Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to enter a light-transmitting state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after the light-transmitting state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), The rotation of the movable accessory motor 73 is stopped and put on standby.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) elapses after the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise and the V movable member 77 is slid to the right. Let Then, it waits for the V movable accessory motor switch 73a to be in a light shielding state, and when the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 after reaching the light shielding state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), that is, V movable. When the member 77 arrives at the initial position, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, the ending operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is terminated, and the normal operation is started.

In the big hit operation of the drum accessory 62, the game control device 100 continues the counterclockwise rotation of the drum accessory motor 66. That is, the drum accessory 62 continues normal operation.
Further, in the jackpot operation of the round lottery item (determination device 80), the game control device 100 continues the counterclockwise rotation of the round lottery item motor 88. That is, the determination device 80 continues normal operation.
In the jackpot operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), the game control device 100 causes the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 to shift alternately between the OFF state and the ON state. That is, the floor 61 performs a reciprocating motion that rotates so that the rear end side of the floor 61 moves up and down. Then, when the big hit operation is completed, the operation shifts to the normal operation.

<Ball biting operation>
FIG. 34 is a timing chart for explaining a ball biting process operation of an accessory. FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b) show a ball biting process operation of a V movable accessory (V movable member 77). (C) shows the ball biting process operation of the drum combination 62, and FIG. 34 (d) shows the ball biting process operation of the round lottery (decision device 80). This ball biting processing operation is executed when the state of the accessory motor switches 66a, 73a, 88a is monitored during the initialization operation or the big hit operation and is determined to be abnormal.

When ball biting occurs in the V movable accessory unit 70, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated in reverse to eliminate the ball biting.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34A, during the clockwise rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73, the V movable accessory motor switch 73a waits for the light passing state or is in a light shielding state. When the state of waiting for the continuation continues for a predetermined time (for example, 3024 milliseconds), the game control device 100 determines that it is abnormal, and executes the ball biting process operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77). In this ball biting processing operation, first, the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) has elapsed, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated counterclockwise. When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) has elapsed, The ball biting process operation of the V movable member 77) is ended, and the state before the ball biting process operation is restored (that is, the operation performed immediately before the ball biting process operation is performed).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), during the counterclockwise rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73, the state where the V movable accessory motor switch 73a waits for the light passing state or enters the light shielding state. When the waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 3024 milliseconds), the game control device 100 determines that the state is abnormal, and performs a ball biting process operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77). Specifically, the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and when a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) elapses, the V movable accessory motor 73 is rotated clockwise. When the number of rotation steps of the V movable accessory motor 73 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the V movable accessory motor 73 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) has elapsed, The ball biting process operation of the V movable member 77) is terminated, and the state before the ball biting process operation is restored.

When ball biting occurs in the drum accessory unit 60, the drum accessory motor 66 is rotated in reverse to eliminate the ball biting.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34C, during the counterclockwise rotation of the drum accessory motor 66, the drum accessory motor switch 66a waits for the light passing state or enters a light shielding state. When the state of waiting for the game continues for a predetermined time (for example, 13956 msec), the game control device 100 determines that there is an abnormality and executes the ball biting process operation of the drum accessory 62. In this ball biting process operation, first, the rotation of the drum accessory motor 66 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds), the drum accessory motor 66 is rotated clockwise. When the number of rotation steps of the drum accessory motor 66 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the drum accessory motor 66 is stopped, and after the predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) has elapsed, the ball engagement of the drum accessory 62 is stopped. The processing operation is terminated, and the state before the ball biting processing operation is restored.

When the ball biting occurs in the determining device 80, the round lottery accessory motor 88 is reversely rotated in order to eliminate the ball biting.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), during the counterclockwise rotation of the round lottery accessory motor 88, the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a waits for a light-transmitting state or is in a light-shielding state. When the state of waiting for the continuation continues for a predetermined time (for example, 7200 milliseconds), the game control device 100 determines that it is abnormal, and executes a ball biting process operation of the round lottery item (determination device 80). In this ball biting processing operation, first, the rotation of the round lottery accessory motor 88 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) has elapsed, the round lottery accessory motor 88 is rotated clockwise. When the number of rotation steps of the round lottery accessory motor 88 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the rotation of the drum accessory motor 66 is stopped, and after a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) has elapsed, the round lottery accessory (determined) The ball biting process operation of the device 80) is terminated, and the state before the ball biting process operation is restored.

C. Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it is difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (illustrated).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, and a power supply device 400 as main components of the control system.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and includes a CPU unit 170 having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 171 and an input having an input port. And a data bus 150 that connects the CPU unit 170, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130, and the like.
Here, the game control device 100 corresponds to a control device, and constitutes an opening control means, a change time selection means, a special figure change control means, and a change time storage means.

  The CPU section 170 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 171 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and a clock used as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 173 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. And a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 171 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and reset for notifying the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 171 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 127. When this RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 171C in the gaming microcomputer 171 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 171. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 171 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 171A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 171B, and a RAM (random access memory) 171C that can be read and written as needed.
The ROM 171B stores non-changeable information (program, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 171C stores a work area for the CPU 171A and various signal and random value storage areas during game control. Used as As the ROM 171B or the RAM 171C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used. The ROM 171B constitutes a variable time storage unit.

In addition, the ROM 171B stores, for example, a variation pattern distribution table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. . The variation pattern distribution table is a time setting of the accessory device 51 (the drum accessory unit 60 and the V movable accessory unit 70) and the determining device 80, the one-time opening symbol of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35, and It is a table for the CPU 171A to refer to patterns such as a symbol distribution rate that is opened twice to determine a variation pattern.
The fluctuation pattern distribution table includes a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern table selected when the special figure 1 fluctuates, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern table selected when the special figure 2 fluctuates, and the like.
In this embodiment, unlike the one type of gaming machine, since it is a so-called feather type gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), for example, the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state or the fluctuation pattern before entering the reach state. There is no table or the like for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, and all the special figure fluctuation results are small hits and there is no losing. That is, when the start prize is won, the opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable prize winning device 35 is always performed. And it becomes the structure from which the frequency | count of opening of movable member 43a, 43b differs by the stop symbol difference of a special figure.

Here, the reach (reach state) includes a display device that can change the display state (for example, the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display of the collective display device 50). When a plurality of display results are derived and displayed and the plurality of display results are in a predetermined special result mode, the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (starting gaming state or special gaming state). In the pachinko machine 1, it means a state of a special figure fluctuation display game that is executed with a low frequency and is executed for a longer time than the average special figure fluctuation display game.
In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Further, for example, a state in which a variable display by a plurality of variable display regions is maintained (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state where the special result mode is different is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

In addition, the special display variation display game may be executed on another display device (for example, the information display unit 45) in correspondence with the special display variation display game.
Thus, for example, a decoration special figure variation display game displays a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined period of time in each of the left and right variation display areas on the display device, and then stops the variation display in the order of left and right. In the left fluctuation display area, the state in which the fluctuation display is stopped in a state that satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, “3”, “5”, or “7”) is reached. It becomes a state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state, and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.
This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special reach (SP reach), premier Reach is set.

The CPU 171A executes a game control program in the ROM 171B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or a solenoid (for example, a big prize opening solenoid 201) or a display device ( For example, a drive signal for the collective display device 50) is generated and output to control the entire pachinko machine 1.
Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 171 uses a special symbol random number for determining the special symbol small hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special symbol variation display game (variable display game in the variation display with various reach and no reach). A random number generation circuit for generating a fluctuation pattern random number and the like for determining an execution time and the like, and a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 171A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 173 ) Timer interrupt signal and a clock generator for generating a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

  Further, the CPU 171A obtains any one variation pattern distribution table from among the plurality of variation pattern distribution tables stored in the ROM 171B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 171A selects and acquires any one variation pattern distribution table from among a plurality of variation pattern distribution tables based on the game result of the special figure variation display game, the start memory number, and the like. To do. Here, when the CPU 171A executes the special figure variation display game, the CPU 171A includes a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern distribution tables stored in the ROM 171B. Eggplant.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.
Furthermore, when the payout control device 200 receives the launch permission signal from the game control device 100 through serial communication, the payout control device 200 outputs this launch permission signal to the launch control device (not shown). Thereby, the launch of the game ball is permitted.
The launch control device receives supply of necessary power from the payout control device 200, and receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device controls a launch motor (not shown) that launches a game ball according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and the launch control device receives a touch switch signal or a signal from a launch stop switch (not shown). Yes. The touch switch signal detects whether or not the player is touching the launch operation handle 11, and the launch stop switch temporarily stops the launch of the game ball and is operated by the player. is there.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 171 includes a gate switch 101, a winning opening switch 102, a left large winning opening switch 103, a right large winning opening switch 104, a left starting opening switch 105, a right starting opening switch 106, and a middle starting opening switch. 107, specific area switches 80a to 80d, remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113, panel radio wave sensor 114, magnetic sensor 115, and negative logic such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches Are provided, and interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b for converting the signal into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V are provided.
Here, the gate switch 101 is a switch that detects a game ball that has passed through the starting gate of the normal symbol, but in this embodiment, since this is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) that does not have a common figure, this switch exists. Instead, it is GND-connected on an external relay board (not shown). Therefore, in FIG. 35, it is shown as a gate switch (GND connection).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 35, when a relay board 151 having an electrical pattern for outputting a test signal (for example, a gate passing signal 1 according to the normal symbol 1) for output to the test firing test apparatus is connected, In the embodiment, this test signal is always output as OFF. Although such a configuration seems to be useless at first glance, this game control device 100 is commonly used when developing a single-wing game machine having a normal symbol and its starting gate as another model. There is a big merit that you can.
Further, as described above, the winning opening switch 102 detects game balls won in the general winning openings 36a and 36b of the game board 30, and 1 to n are provided according to the number of general winning openings. The left big prize opening switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43 a in the variable prize winning device 35 and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51. Similarly, the right big prize opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43 b in the variable prize winning device 35 and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51.
That is, the left big prize opening switch 103 and the right big prize opening switch 104 function as a prize opening switch for detecting a game ball won to the variable prize winning device 35 which is a big prize opening.

The left start opening switch 105 detects a game ball won in the first start winning opening 33a of the game board 30. The right start opening switch 106 detects a game ball won in the first start winning opening 33b. The middle start opening switch 107 detects a game ball won in the second start winning opening 34.
The specific area switches 80a to 80d detect that the game ball that has flowed into the determination device 80 has passed through the specific area. When it is detected that the game ball has passed the specific area, a big hit will occur.
The first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 detects a game ball that has flowed into the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35 (a game ball that has flowed into the big winning port but has not flowed into the specific area of the determination device 80). In addition, it has a function of detecting whether or not the sphere that has flowed into the discharge channel remains in the variable winning device 35. Similarly, the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects a game ball that has passed through a specific area of the determination device 80, and whether or not a game ball that has passed through the specific area remains in the variable winning device 25. It has a function to detect.
The board radio wave sensor 114 detects the emission of radio waves (for example, unauthorized radio waves) to the pachinko machine 1, and a plurality of board radio wave sensors may be arranged. In that case, 1 to m pieces are provided.
The magnetic sensor 115 detects illegal magnetism, and is arranged in the vicinity of the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 or the proximity sensor, and a plurality of (for example, 1 to k pieces) so as to cover a place where the magnet can be applied. ) Is provided.

The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.
The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 162, the third input port 163, or the fourth input port 164 and read into the gaming microcomputer 171 through the data bus 150. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the gate switch 101, the winning port switch 102, the left large winning port switch 103, the right large winning port switch 104, the left starting port switch 105, the right starting port switch 106, and the middle A detection signal of the start port switch 107 is input to the second input port 162.
Among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the specific area switches 80a to 80d, the remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113, and the panel radio wave sensor 114 are input to the fourth input port 164.
Further, the fourth input port 164 is inputted with signals from motor switches such as the drum accessory motor switch 66a, the V movable accessory motor switch 73a, and the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a.

Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a, the abnormality detection signal 1 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 163, and the output of the proximity I / F 121b includes the magnetic sensor 115. And the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is also input to the third input port 163.
In addition, detection signals from the vibration sensor 116 and the glass frame open detection switch 117 are input to the third input port 163, and a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 4). And a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command) is input.
The vibration sensor 116 detects improper vibration, and one vibration sensor 116 is arranged on a so-called veneer plate on the back side of the variable winning device 35 as a center case. The glass frame open detection switch 117 detects the opening of the glass frame 5.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 162 and a part of the output to the fourth input port 164 are not shown through the relay board 151 from the game control device 100. It is also supplied to test equipment. Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals of the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, and the middle start port switch 107 are input to the gaming microcomputer 171 in addition to the second input port 162. It is configured as follows.
As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.
The data held in the second input port 162 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 171 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 162. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 163, the fourth input port 164, and the first input port 161 described later.

The first input port 161 receives a detection signal from the body frame open detection switch 118 that detects the opening of the front frame 4, a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality) from the payout control device 200, Shooting ball break switch signal (signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 10 (full) Signal), a touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the firing operation handle 11), and signals from the Schmitt buffer 126 and the RAM initialization switch 127 are input. Yes.
The first input port 161 captures each signal and supplies it to the game microcomputer 171 via the data bus 150.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with the Schmitt buffer 126 described above for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 171 and the like. Has a function of removing noise from the input signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 127 are once input to the first input port 161 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 171 via the data bus 150. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 171 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 126 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 171 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 151 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 151 for output to the test board 151. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 151.
The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 161, 162, 163, 164 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 171 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 171 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 171 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 171 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 171 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 150 and is connected to the data bus 150. A special change in accordance with a start prize (a prize to the first start prize port 33a, 23b or the second start prize port 34) to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization not shown. A buffer 133 that outputs special map information of the display game via the relay board 151 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 151 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 115 and the panel radio wave sensor 114, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 171 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 150 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 151. The relay board 151 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 171 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 151, and the signal of the port that is selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 150 and is configured to open and close the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35. The first big winning port solenoid 201, the second big winning port solenoid 202, and the accessory device A second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data of an accessory solenoid such as a floor accessory solenoid 61b1 for rotationally driving the floor 61 in 51 is provided.
Further, the output unit 130 includes a fifth output port 137 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A sixth output port 138 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is also provided with a seventh output port 139 and a sixth output port 138 for outputting information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 152. The external information terminal board 152 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the seventh output port 139 to the dispensing control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a first big prize winning solenoid 201, a second big prize winning solenoid 202, and a combination that drive the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 output from the second output port 134, respectively. A first driver (driving circuit) 140 that receives an opening / closing data signal of an accessory solenoid such as a floor accessory solenoid 61b1 for rotationally driving the floor portion 61 of the article device 51 up and down to generate and output a solenoid driving signal; In response to the opening / closing data signals of the drum accessory motor 66 and the V movable accessory motor 73 in the accessory device 51 output from the third output port 135 and the round lottery accessory motor 88 in the determination device 80, a motor drive signal is generated. Current supply of the connection monitor LED 153 output from the second driver (drive circuit) 141 to be output and the fourth output port 136 The third driver 142 is provided for outputting ON / OFF drive signal segment line.
Here, the connection monitor LED 153 is turned on when the game control device 100 as the main board is activated, and has a function of monitoring that the main board is in operation. In addition, when the number of parts to be operated by the game control device 100 increases in the future, there is an advantage that the fourth output port 136 can be used corresponding to the increased number of parts.
The connection monitor LEDs 153 may be connected in a number corresponding to the signal lines output from the fourth output port 136 on a one-to-one basis, or may be connected to a plurality of signal lines. Also good.
Further, the output unit 130 outputs from the fourth driver 143 and the sixth output port 138 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the fifth output port 137. An external information signal supplied from the fifth driver 144, the seventh output port 139, and the sixth output port 138 that outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 to an external device such as a management device Is output to the external information terminal board 152. A sixth driver 145 is provided.

The first driver 140 has a power supply for driving solenoids operating at 32V (first solenoid award winning solenoid 201, second award winning solenoid 202, floor accessory solenoid 61b1, etc.). DC32V is supplied from the power supply apparatus 400 as a voltage. In addition, the second driver 141 has a power supply voltage so that it can drive motors operating at 12V (such as drum motors 66, V movable accessory motors 73, and round lottery accessory motors 88). DC12V is supplied from the power supply device 400. Similarly, the third driver 142 is supplied with DC12V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that the connection monitor LED 153 operating at 12V can be driven.
Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the fourth driver 143 that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the fifth driver 144 for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The fourth driver 143 that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the fifth driver 144 that outputs the ground potential draws the current from the cathode terminal via the segment line. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The sixth driver 145 that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 152 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 140, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 151 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 146 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 146 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 171 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection apparatus 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 171 as in a general general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 161, 162, 163, 164 are provided. Absent.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
Here, in the first embodiment, an information display 45 having an LED is arranged on the upper part of the variable winning device 35 of the game board 30 under the control of the effect control device 300, and various game states are displayed by the information display 45. FIG. 36 shows an example in which an information display 45 using liquid crystal is used in place of the information display 45 having LEDs as a modification of the first embodiment. Yes.
In the following description, the configuration adopting the information display unit 45 using liquid crystal will be described, and the configuration will be described with reference to the information display unit 45 including LEDs.

The effect control device 300 is connected to a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and an information display 45 using liquid crystal according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in the same manner as the game microcomputer 171. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for video display, and a tone generator LSI 314 for controlling output of sound in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 13a, 13b, and 13c. I have.
Therefore, in the example of FIG. 36, in the configuration employing the information display unit 45 using liquid crystal, the information display unit 45 using liquid crystal includes various image displays under the control of the VDP 312 according to a command from the effect control device 300. Various game state display, big hit round display, etc. will be performed, and it is possible to perform powerful and various effects.
In FIG. 36, when the information display 45 including LEDs is adopted instead of the information display 45 using liquid crystal (the case of the first embodiment), the same as the board decoration LED control circuit 332 described later. As in the case shown in FIG. 35, using the circuit, the output port and the driver are arranged via the address / data bus 340 with respect to the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and the information display provided with the LED. What is necessary is just to set it as the structure connected to the container 45. FIG.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 171, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, turns on the decoration lamp, And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.
Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the information display unit 45 using liquid crystal and lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 5 or the game board 30, and data transmission A synchronization signal STS giving timing is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.
The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the information display unit 45 using liquid crystal by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 uses liquid crystal via the signal conversion circuit 313. It is displayed on the information display 45.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speakers 13a and 13b provided on the glass frame 5 and the lower speaker 13c provided on the operation panel 6, and a sound source The sound generated by the LSI 314 is output from the upper speakers 13a and 13b and the lower speaker 13c via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command (effect command) transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 171 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 351 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the variable prize device 35 as a center case). The frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the frame decoration device 12 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 30 (including the variable prize device 35 as the center case) are provided. A board production movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the board production device 46 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 5, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 15 a built in the effect button 15 provided on the operation panel 6, a touch panel 16 provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 15, and the board effect device 46. The function of inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 by detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 93 that detects the initial position of the effect motor in the sound volume, and the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. The production effect switch 93 includes a first V production switch 63b1 in the equipment device 51 and a second V production switch 87b1 in the determination device 80.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. DC32V, information display unit 45 composed of liquid crystal panel (that is, information display unit 45 using liquid crystal), DC12V for driving the motor and LED, DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, motor and LED , Is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving the speaker. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. The effect control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 49 that cools various portions of the pachinko machine 1, and the cooling FAN 49 is driven when the effect control device 300 is powered on.

D. Operation of Control System Next, control of the pachinko machine 1 (game machine) that performs such a game will be described.
First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 171 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 171 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 40 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main process of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 171) will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process starts based on the fact that the gaming microcomputer 171 is forcibly reset. That is, when a power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 400 is turned on, a reset signal from the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is sent at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 171 is turned on and the reset signal is released, the gaming microcomputer 171 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the game signal is released after the reset signal is turned on and the gaming microcomputer 171 is activated. Further, when the worker wants to initialize the user work RAM or the like of the game control device 100, it is necessary to turn on the power switch while turning on the RAM initialization switch 127.

When the gaming microcomputer 171 is activated, first, a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then a stack for setting a stack pointer that is a start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs. A pointer setting process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4).
In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read (step S6), and a process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and a command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that the initialization switch signal is input to the input port 1 (first input port 161), and the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read before the start of the standby time. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 127 can be reliably detected. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 127 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or until the standby time elapses after the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue operating 127. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9).
If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S10; YES), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited for to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; NO), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; NO), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; YES), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).
In this embodiment, the RWM indicates the RAM 171C. However, the RWM is not limited to the RAM, and a read / write storage element such as an EEPROM may be used as the RWM.

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 171 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. From the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161), it is determined whether or not the initialization switch (RAM initialization switch 127; hereinafter the same) is turned on (step S16).
When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; NO), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; YES), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; YES), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; YES), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; YES), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; NO or step S18; NO). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; NO), the process proceeds to step S24 in FIG. 38 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S21 of FIG. 38, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.
Next, the number of ball biting processes (ball biting process operation) in the motor control area for all the motors is cleared to “0” (step S22). Here, it is determined whether or not the ball biting has occurred in the drum accessory unit 60, and when the ball biting has occurred, the number of times of counting the processing (FIG. 34 (c)) for avoiding it is determined. A process for clearing to “0” in advance, determining whether or not the ball biting has occurred in the V movable accessory unit 70, and for avoiding it when the ball biting has occurred (FIG. 34 (a)). , (B)) is previously cleared to “0”, and it is determined whether or not the ball biting has occurred in the determining device 80, and when the ball biting has occurred, The number of times of counting the process (FIG. 34 (d)) is cleared to “0” in advance.

  After step S22, the power failure restoration command corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( Step S23), the process proceeds to step S29. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S23, a model designation command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a game state designation command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demo command if waiting for a customer, a command being restored otherwise), etc. Send multiple commands. Depending on the model, an effect number information command is also transmitted in addition to these commands.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S24, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S24), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S25), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S26). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S28), and it progresses to step S29.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step S28, a model designation command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a RAM initialization command (customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, and RAM initialization is performed with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the user). Depending on the model, an effect number information command is also transmitted in addition to these commands.

  In step S29, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 171 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 171. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 173 and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 171A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 171A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers for determining the hit pattern of the special figure) After saving the initial value (start value) of (special symbol random number) in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S31), an interrupt is permitted in step S33 as described later.
In this embodiment, the initial value random number is substantially determined by one of the special symbol random numbers. In this case, the soft random number register 1 may be prepared as a predetermined register (soft random number register). become. On the other hand, when there are a large number of random numbers to be determined for initial value random numbers, n number of predetermined registers such as soft random number registers 1 to n are prepared.
The random number generation circuit in the CPU 171A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value (start value) of the initial value random number. Thus, the regularity of random numbers generated by software can be broken, and it is difficult for a player to obtain an illegal random number.

After step S31, the ON data of the connection monitor LED 153 is output (step S32).
In this embodiment, a large number of output ports are prepared so that the game control device 100 as the main board can be used in common among different models. Specifically, the connection monitor LED 153 is connected to the fourth output port 136 via the driver 142. Incidentally, three accessory motors (a drum accessory motor 66, a V movable accessory motor 73, and a round lottery accessory motor 88) are connected to the third output port 135 via a driver 141. In this manner, drive data can be output to three motors from one output port.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, by arranging the fourth output port 136, if the connection monitor LED 153 is removed, another three motors can be added. Therefore, the connection monitor LED 153 is connected to the surplus output port of the current model (here, the fourth output port 136), and the motor is added while monitoring that the main board (game control device 100) is operating. Easy going.

After step S32, interrupt is permitted in step S33 as described above.
Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S34, and a process of updating the special symbol initial value random number by “+1” (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol initial value random number update process) is performed. This is because the regularity of the random numbers is destroyed by updating the special symbol initial value random numbers by “+1”. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an initial value is set to one random number (special symbol initial value random number).
Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, a random number (special symbol random number) that determines the symbol of the special symbol is generated using a random number generated by a random number generator. Has been. In addition, in the random number that determines the winning symbol of the special figure, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number makes a round. . Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached.

  After the special symbol initial value random number update process in step S34, the number (for example, twice) of checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus is set (step S35). ), It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S36; NO), the process returns to the special symbol initial value random number update process (step S34). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the special symbol initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt (step S33) before the special symbol initial value random number update process (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the special symbol initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the interrupt process by waiting for the timer interrupt by the special symbol initial value random number update process.

  The special symbol initial value random number update process in step S34 includes a method of performing the special symbol initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process, and such a method is adopted. In some cases, in order to avoid the special symbol initial value random number update process being executed in both cases, when performing the special symbol initial value random number update process in the main process, disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt. Although it is necessary to cancel the special symbol initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing as in this embodiment, if the special symbol initial value random number update processing is performed only in the main processing, There is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before, and this has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S35 (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S37; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S37; YES), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S38), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S39) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S40), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S41). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S42) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S43), access to the RWM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S44), it waits for the power to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) to be cut off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.
In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has the RAM 171C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 127) operable from the outside, and the initialization operation unit operated. And initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 171C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 171C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S42) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step S51, and the number of repetitions is set in step S52. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of the RWM being used. Next, after setting “0” as the calculated value in step S53, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step S54. In this way, the contents of each address are added as a calculated value. Next, the calculation address is updated by “+1” in step S55, the number of repetitions is updated by “−1” in step S56, and it is checked whether the calculation is completed. In step S57, it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the decision result in the step S57 is NO, the process returns to the step S54 to repeat the routine. When the number of repeated times is equal to the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation has been completed, and the process exits from step S57 to YES and ends the routine.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the RWM is powered off.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 40, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 171A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 171, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 40 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S61). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S62). In step S62, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, input processing (step S63) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on output data set in various processes, solenoids and the like (first solenoid award opening solenoid 201, second award winning opening solenoid 202, floor accessory solenoid 61b1 and other accessory solenoids, drum accessory motor 66, V An output process (step S64) for performing drive control of the actuator of the movable accessory motor 73, the accessory motor such as the round lottery accessory motor 88) and the like is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device (not shown) via the payout control device 200. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating a launch permission state viewed from the payout control device 200 is also included. It is generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S65) and a random number update process 1 (step S66) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, a winning opening switch 102, a left large winning opening switch 103, a right large winning opening switch 104, a left starting opening switch 105, a right starting opening switch 106, a middle starting opening switch 107, specific area switches 80a to 80d, a remaining ball discharge opening. Winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S67) for monitoring whether or not a normal signal is input from the switches 112 and 113 and monitoring an error (such as whether the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are not opened). )I do.
Further, a remaining sphere monitoring process is performed (step S68). The remaining ball monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not a game ball won in the variable winning device 35 is pulled out and remains in the variable winning device 35.
Next, a game stop error process is performed (step S69). In the game stop error process, when there is an error that stops the game (such as fraudulent radio wave), the game is stopped, while monitoring whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 127 to cancel the error. Is.

Next, it is determined whether or not an error operation is being performed (step S70). This is to determine whether an error such as radio wave fraud has occurred and is operating. If no error operation is in progress (step S70; NO), it is determined whether or not an error is waiting (step S71). On the other hand, if an error operation is being performed (step S70; YES), the process jumps to step S74.
If it is waiting for error cancellation (step S71; YES), it is determined that the error has not been canceled yet, and the process jumps to step S75. Therefore, in this case, each process of step S72 to step S74 is not performed, and a special game, a motor control of the accessory device 51 (the drum accessory unit 60 and the V movable accessory unit 70), the determination device 80, and the like are performed. There will be no gaming game.
On the other hand, if not waiting for error release (step S71; NO), special figure game processing is performed (step S72) and segment LED editing processing is performed (step S73). The special figure game process is a process related to the special figure variation display game. The segment LED editing process is provided in the pachinko machine 1, and the segment LED for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information about the game has a desired content. Is driven to display.

Next, motor control processing for performing motor control on the accessory device 51 and the determining device 80 is performed (step S74).
When the process proceeds from step S74 to step S75 or when the process jumps from step S71 to step S75, an abnormal discharge monitoring process is performed in step S75. This is illegal if the game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 and the game balls that have been discharged from the variable winning device 35 are monitored and there are more game balls that are discharged than the flowed game balls. A process of determining that there is a possibility of abnormality and stopping the game is performed.
Next, a fraud monitoring process is performed (step S76). This is a board for performing a process of checking a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 115 to determine whether there is an abnormality and performing a process for determining whether there is an abnormality by checking a magnet fraud monitoring or a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 114. Radio fraud monitoring is performed.

Next, a firing control process is performed (step S77). This is to save the output data of the firing stop if an error that stops the game has occurred, or save the output data of the permission to fire if such an error has not occurred. Is.
Then, external information editing processing (step S78) for setting signals to be output to various external devices to the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in this embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for permitting interrupts) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S63) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input process, first, the address of the input port 1, that is, the first input port 161 is prepared (step S91). In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.
Next, in step S92, the address of the switch control area 1 in the RWM is prepared. In step S93, unused bit data is prepared, and in step S94, bit data to be inverted is prepared. For example, since the RAM initialization switch 127 needs to invert the detection signal, bit data for such a sensor / switch is prepared.
Here, unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port. The names in the flowchart are the same for bit data, but unused bit data and inverted bit data are different. However, the data may have the same value as a result.

In step S95, switch read processing is performed for input port 1 (first input port 161).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 161) are as follows.
・ Glass frame open detection switch 117 (bit 0)
-Body frame open detection switch 118 (bit 1)
RAM initialization switch 127 (bit 2) (inverted bit)
・ Power failure monitoring signal (bit 3)
・ Discharge abnormality status signal (bit 4)
・ Shoot ball break switch signal (bit 5)
・ Overflow switch signal (bit 6)
・ Touch switch signal (bit 7)
Through the processes from step S91 to step S95, information related to the switch monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read.

Next, similarly, a process of reading the information of the switch to be monitored at the input port 2 (second input port 162) is performed.
First, the address of the input port 2 (second input port 162) is prepared in step S96, and then the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared in step S97. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S98, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S99.
Next, in step S100, switch read processing is performed for input port 2 (second input port 162).

Here, the switches monitored at the input port 2 (second input port 162) are as follows. Note that the switch monitored at the input port 2 has no bit to be inverted.
・ Left start port switch 105 (bit 0): “Start port 1 winning signal”
Here, the left start port switch 105 is also output as a “start port 1 winning signal” of the test signal by pattern branching, and this is the same for each switch described later, which is indicated on the right side of each bit mode. Yes.
Middle start switch 107 (bit 1): “Start port 2 winning signal”
Right start port switch 106 (bit 2): “Start port 3 winning signal”
-Winning mouth switch 102 (bit 3): "Normal winning mouth 1 winning signal"
4th specific area switch 80d (bit 4): “condition device operating area 2 passing signal 1”, “actual object continuous operating area 2 passing signal 1”
・ Large prize opening switch 103 (bit 5): "Special electric accessory 1 winning signal 1"
・ Right large prize opening switch 104 (bit 6): “Special electric accessory 1 winning signal 2”
Third specific area switch 80c (bit 7): “condition device operating area 1 passing signal 3”, “actual object continuous operating area 2 passing signal 3”
Through the processes from step S96 to step S100, information related to the switch monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 162) is read.

Next, similarly, a process of reading information on a switch to be monitored at the input port 3 (third input port 163) is performed.
First, the address of the input port 3 (third input port 163) is prepared in step S101, and then the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared in step S102. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S103, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S104.
Next, in step S105, a switch reading process is performed for the input port 3 (third input port 163).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 163) are as follows.
-Panel radio wave sensor 114 (bit 0) (inverted bit)
・ Switch abnormality detection signal 1 (bit 1)
・ Magnetic sensor 115 (bit 2)
・ Frame error signal (bit 3)
・ Payout busy signal (bit 4)
・ Switch abnormality detection signal 2 (bit 5)
・ Vibration sensor 116 (bit 6) (reversing bit)
・ Unused (bit 7)
Here, as shown in FIG. 35, the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is an abnormality detection signal 1 output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected in the output of the proximity I / F 121a. Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is an abnormality detection signal 2 that is output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121b.
Through the processing from step S101 to step S105, information related to the switch monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 163) is read.

Next, similarly, a process of reading information on a switch to be monitored at the input port 4 (fourth input port 164) is performed.
First, the address of the input port 4 (fourth input port 164) is prepared in step S106, and then the address of the switch control area 4 in the RWM is prepared in step S107. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S108, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S109.
Next, in step S110, a switch reading process is performed for the input port 4 (fourth input port 164).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 4 (fourth input port 164) are as follows. Note that the switch monitored at the input port 4 has no bit to be inverted.
First specific area switch 80a (bit 0): “condition device operating area 1 passing signal 1”, “actual object continuous operating area 1 passing signal 1”
First remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (bit 1): “Special electric accessory 1 discharge port passing signal 1”
Second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 (bit 2): “Special electric accessory 1 discharge port passing signal 2”
Second specific area switch 80b (bit 3): “Condition device operation area 1 passage signal 2”, “Accessory continuous operation area 1 passage signal 2”
・ Unused (bit 4): Circuit connection to a relay board (not shown) as a spare motor switch ・ Round lottery accessory motor switch 88a (bit 5)
-Taiko accessory motor switch 66a (bit 6)
・ V movable accessory motor switch 73a (bit 7)

After step S110, the process proceeds to step S111, where the exclusive OR of the previous finalized state and the current finalized state reversed is saved in the RWM as a falling edge, and the input process is terminated.
This is because the switch read processing is performed twice in one interrupt processing at a predetermined time difference, thereby increasing the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt cycle and simplifying the structure design. It is what balances. The details will be described in a later-described switch read processing routine.

[Switch read processing]
Next, a subroutine of the switch reading process (steps S95, S100, S105, S110) in the above-described input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S121). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S122), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S123), and then the target switch control area in the RWM is set. Save (store) in the port input state (step S124). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms = 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S125).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S126). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S127), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S128), and then the port input state of the target switch control area (First data) is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) (step S129). Thereafter, the bit, that is, the signal changed by the first reading and the second reading is detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S130). Specifically, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the first and second states of the read input port state is “1” and the different bit is “0”. Next, a logical product of the determined bit pattern and the port input state (second time data) is obtained and set as the current determined bit (step S131).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is 0, and a different bit is 1 (step S132), and the logical product of the unconfirmed bit pattern and the final state at the time of the previous interrupt Is taken as the previous hold bit (step S133). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the final bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved in the RWM as the current final state (step S134). The exclusive OR between the previous and current final state is taken and saved in the RWM as the rising edge. (Step S135), the switch reading process ends.

If the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be performed. Also, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, the design of the electric circuit that extends the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch are slowed down. It is necessary to design the structure of the spherical channel.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt period by performing the switch read process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. It is possible to achieve both the increase and the ease of structural design and avoid the above problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (step S64) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, all output data of the port 137 (see FIG. 35) for outputting the segment data of the batch display device 50 is first turned off (step S141). Next, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device 50 is updated ("+1" is updated in the range of 0 to 3) (step S142).
The present embodiment is an example in which the collective display device 50 is composed of LEDs and is dynamically lit. Here, “Special Figure 1 Symbol Display”, “Special Figure 2 Symbol Display”, “Special Figure 2 Hold Display”, “Round Information such as “display” and “game state display (during big hit, other than big hit)” are displayed.

Subsequently, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (loaded) (step S143). Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S144). The external information to be combined here is information related to “door / frame opening” and “security signal”.
Next, the synthesized data is output to the digit / external information output port (sixth output port 138) (step S145). The sixth output port 138 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected.
Next, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 152 is loaded and synthesized (step S146).
The external information to be combined here is as follows.
-1 signal per jackpot-2 signals per jackpot-Number signal for winning a prize-Number of times signal for a winning feature-Start signal 1 signal-Start signal 2 signal-Main prize ball signal

Next, the synthesized data is output to the external information / firing permission signal output port (seventh output port 139) (step S148). The seventh output port 136 is an output port for outputting information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 152 as external information. Next, it is determined whether or not an error for stopping the game has occurred (step S149). If no error for stopping the game has occurred (step S149; YES), the process proceeds to step S150. On the other hand, if an error for stopping the game has occurred (step S149; NO), the process branches to step S153.
When the process proceeds to step S150, the segment line output data is loaded (obtained) from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter in step S150, and the acquired segment output data is sent to the segment output port ( Output to the fifth output port 137). The fifth output port 137 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50.
Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port is synthesized and output to the second output port 134 (step S151). The second output port 134 is a port for outputting data to be output to the solenoid, and the solenoid corresponding to the data to be output here is as follows.
・ First big prize opening solenoid 201
・ Second grand prize solenoid 202
-Floor accessory solenoid 61b1

After step S151, the process proceeds to step S152.
On the other hand, if NO is determined in the previous step S149, as described above, the process branches to step S153, and the off data is output to the solenoid output port. As a result, off-data is output to the second output port 134 for outputting solenoid output data, so that the above-described first big prize opening solenoid 201, second big prize opening solenoid 202, floor accessory solenoid. All of the accessory solenoids such as 61b1 are turned off and do not operate.
Then, after step S153, the process proceeds to step S152.
When the process proceeds from step S151 or step S153 to step S152, it is determined in this step S152 whether or not an error is awaiting. If it is not waiting for error release (step S152; NO), it is determined that the game can be advanced, and the data to be output to the motor output port (third output port 135) is synthesized and output in step S154.
The third output port 135 is a port for outputting motor output data. The motor corresponding to the data output here is as follows.
・ Taiko accessory motor 66
・ V movable accessory motor 73
・ Round lottery motor 88
Accordingly, the operation of the accessory motors such as the drum accessory motor 66, the V movable accessory motor 73, and the round lottery accessory motor 88 is permitted.
On the other hand, if waiting for error cancellation (step S152; YES), it is necessary to wait until the error is canceled, so it is determined that the game cannot proceed, and in step S155, the motor output port (third output port 135) is determined. ) To output off data. Accordingly, the operation of the accessory motors such as the drum accessory motor 66, the V movable accessory motor 73, and the round lottery accessory motor 88 is not permitted.

After passing through step S154 or step S155, the process proceeds to step S156 to load and synthesize output data 1 to 3 of the test signal output to the test firing test apparatus, and a test terminal output port provided on the relay board 151 1 is output (step S156). Thereafter, the test signal output data 4 to 6 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 provided on the relay board 151 (step S157).
Next, the test signal output data 7 to 8 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 provided on the relay board 151 (step S158). Also, the test signal output data 9 to 10 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 provided on the relay board 151 (step S159). Further, the test signal output data 11 to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test terminal output port 5 provided on the relay board 151 (step S160), and FIG. End the output process.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S65) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, the number of winnings to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the counter area 2 (step S171).
The structure of the winning number counter area 2 is, for example, as follows.
・ 3 prize ball counters ・ 10 prize ball counters ・ 14 prize ball counters Each prize number counter area can store up to 255 prizes, and when the prize number counter area 2 is checked, the above counter is incremented. Check in order (from 3 prize ball counters).
There is also a winning counter area 1, which will be described in detail later.

Returning to the flow, if there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (step S171: NO), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S172), and all the winning number counter areas are counted. It is determined whether the number check has been completed (step S173). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S173; YES), the process jumps to step S182.
On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S173; NO), the process returns to step S171 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S171 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area 2 (step S171; YES), the process proceeds to step S174. Then, the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S174), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 is acquired (step S175). Next, the value in the remaining award ball area and the current payout number are added (step S176), and the addition result is saved in the remaining award ball area (step S177). As a result, the current payout amount is added to the value in the remaining award ball area until the previous time, and the current total value is saved in the award ball remaining area.
Each time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is incremented by “+1” and updated (details will be described later).
Next, “10” is subtracted from the addition result of step S177 (step S178), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S179). If the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S179; YES), the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by adding “+1” (step S180), and then this subtraction is “0” or more. The result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S181). After step S181, the process returns to step S178 to repeat the loop. Accordingly, a prize ball is generated by the game, and the number of payouts is added to the value of the remaining prize ball number area until the previous time, “10” is subtracted from the addition result, and the subtraction result is “0” or more The processing from step S178 to step S181 is repeated.
If the subtraction result is less than “0” (step S179; NO), the process branches to step S182.

Here, among the processes shown in FIG. 44, the processes in the left column in the figure (from step S171 to step S181) are in charge of the process of updating the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal. On the other hand, among the processes shown in FIG. 44, the process in the right column (steps S182 to S191) to be described later is in charge of the process of transmitting the payout command.
Now, returning to the flow and proceeding to step S182, if the payout command transmission timer is not “0”, the payout command transmission timer is updated by “−1” (that is, subtracted by “−1”). In this method, the payout command is not transmitted every timer interrupt, but the elapse of the predetermined time is counted in order to send it after a predetermined time. In addition, as a premise for transmitting the payout command, for example, the payout control device 200 (payout control board) side is also in a state in which a prize ball can be paid out.
Next, it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S183). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S183; NO), the current routine is terminated. Return. Therefore, this routine is repeated until the payout command transmission timer becomes “0”.

When the payout command transmission timer becomes “0” (step S183; YES), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S184). In the determination in step S184, the determination is made not by looking at the state of the output port but by looking at the payout busy signal flag. If the payout busy signal is busy (step S184; YES), the current routine is terminated and the process returns. Accordingly, this routine is repeated until the payout busy signal is not busy.
Here, the condition that the payout busy signal is busy is as follows.
• During payout operation • During ball lending operation • During shot ball out of error • Overflow error • Incorrect frame radio wave • Discharged ball detection switch is abnormal: (Switch that monitors the ball that has been paid out)
・ Insufficient payout error ・ In an excessive payout error ・ When there is a count of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of game balls remaining) (when it is not 0)

If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S184; NO), among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and 14 prize balls) Then, it is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (step S185).
The structure of the winning number counter area 1 is, for example, as follows.
・ 3 prize ball counters ・ 10 prize ball counters ・ 14 prize ball counters Each prize number counter area can store up to 65,535 prizes. Check in order (from 3 prize ball counters).

Returning to the flow, if there is no count number in the winning number counter area 1 (step S185: NO), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S186), and all the winning number counter areas are counted. It is determined whether the number check is completed (step S187). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S187; YES), the payout command transmission process ends and the process returns.
On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S187; NO), the process returns to step S185 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S185 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area 1 (step S185; YES), the process proceeds to step S188. Then, the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S188), and a payout command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S189). Next, the acquired payout command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S190). Thereby, a payout command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 at a predetermined timing. Next, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S191). The payout command transmission timer area is an area in which the value of the payout command transmission timer described in step S182 is written. After step S191, the payout command transmission process is terminated and the process returns.
With the above processing, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 performs processing for paying out the game ball based on this payout command.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S66) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the special symbol random number.
In the random number update process 1, it is first determined whether the special symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S201).
If the special symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S201; NO), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. On the other hand, when the special symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S201; YES), the special symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S202), and the next initial value of the loaded special symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S203), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S67) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The prize opening switch / state monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (signal change) from a switch provided at each of the various prize winning openings, and monitoring the state.
In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a left large winning opening switch monitoring table corresponding to the left large winning opening switch 103 (for example, a port number to which a detection signal from the left large winning opening switch 103 is input and the signal) (Data indicating the bit position and the like in this port is stored) (step S211). The left big prize opening switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable prize winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51.
Note that when the movable members 43 a and 43 b of the variable winning device 35 are opened, the game ball flows into the accessory device 51 through the winning space 41.
In the present embodiment, two left winning port switch 103 and right large winning port switch 104 are provided as switches for detecting a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51, and the game ball flowing into the accessory device 51 is left Since it is detected by either the big prize opening switch 103 or the right big prize opening switch 104, a left big prize opening switch monitoring table corresponding to one left big prize opening switch 103 is prepared here. Next, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step for monitoring whether or not the variable winning device 35 has an illegal winning, even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not opened, and detecting a normal winning) S212) is executed.

After that, the right big prize port switch monitoring table corresponding to the right big prize port switch 104 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the right big prize port switch 104 is inputted, the bit position in the port of the signal, etc.) Is prepared) (step S213). The right big prize opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable prize winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51.
In the present embodiment, two left winning port switch 103 and right large winning port switch 104 are provided as switches for detecting a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51, and the game ball flowing into the accessory device 51 is left Since either the big prize opening switch 103 or the right big prize opening switch 104 is detected, the right big prize opening switch monitoring table corresponding to the other right big prize opening switch 104 is prepared here. Next, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step for monitoring whether or not the variable winning device 35 has an illegal winning, even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not opened, and detecting a normal winning) S214) is executed.
Further, a start port error monitoring process for detecting an abnormality based on the detection states of the left start port switch 105, the middle start port switch 107, and the right start port switch 106 is performed (step S215).

Next, a winning monitoring table of winning opening switches that can always win is prepared (step S216). The following are the prize opening switches that can always be awarded.
・ Left starter switch 105
・ Middle start port switch 107
・ Right start port switch 106
・ Winning mouth switch 102

Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is performed (step S217). The detailed procedure of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.
Next, the state scan counter is updated (“+1” is updated in the range of 0 to 3) (step S218). The state scan counter is for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors as the gaming machine state is to be monitored this time.
Subsequently, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S219).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 as gaming machine states are as follows, and these are used for monitoring abnormalities in the shooting ball break switch, overflow switch, and dispensing control device 200 from the dispensing control device 200. Respond to errors.
• When 0: Switch error error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
• When 1: Shooting ball break error • When 2: Overflow error • 3: Discharge error error

Next, a gaming machine state check process is performed (step S220). This is to check for errors in the prepared gaming machine state monitoring table 1 (details will be described later).
Subsequently, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S221).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 as gaming machine states are as follows, and these are fraudulent frame radio waves from the glass frame opening detection switch 117, the body frame opening detection switch 118, and the payout control device 200. Corresponds to signals, touch switch signals, etc.
・ When 0: Glass frame 5 opened (front frame opened)
・ When 1: Front frame 4 opened (game frame opened)
・ When 2: The frame radio wave is illegal. ・ When 3: Touch switch is turned on (When the shooting operation handle 11 is touched, the touch switch provided on the shooting operation handle 11 is turned on)
Next, a gaming machine state check process is performed (step S222). This is to check for errors in the prepared gaming machine state monitoring table 2 (details will be described later).
Next, it is determined whether or not the state scan counter is “0” (step S223). Since the state scan counter is updated by “+1” in the range of 0 to 3, it is determined here whether or not it is “0”.
If the status scan counter is not “0” (step S223; NO), the winning prize switch / status monitoring process is terminated and the process returns. Therefore, the routine is repeated at this time.

On the other hand, if the state scan counter is “0” (step S223; YES), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S224).
The type of error monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 as the gaming machine state includes a switch abnormality 2 error. The switch abnormality 2 error is an error when an abnormality such as a connector disconnection in various sensors or switches connected to the proximity I / F 121b is detected.
Next, a gaming machine state check process is performed (step S225). This is to check errors prepared in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (details will be described later).
Next, a payout busy signal check process is performed (step S226). This is to check whether the payout busy signal is busy. Since the status scan counter is updated by “+1” in the range of 0 to 3, the payout busy signal check process is executed once every four times. Accordingly, the payout busy signal is monitored (checked) at a cycle of 16 ms.
After step S224, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & winning monitoring process (steps S212 and S214) in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning monitoring process, each of the two left big prize opening switches 103 and the right big prize opening switch 104 for detecting a game ball to be won in the variable prize winning device 35 is a left start opening switch 105 as a prize opening switch that can always win. This process is performed for the middle start port switch 107, the right start port switch 106, and the winning port switch 102. Regarding the variable winning device 35, since it is easy to perform fraud in which the movable members 43a and 43b are forcibly opened and the game balls are inserted to pay out the prize balls, fraud monitoring is performed in addition to the detection of the winning.
Here, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table prepared for explaining the fraud & winning prize monitoring process in the winning mouth switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
・ Data for judging whether there is an input (monitor switch bit)
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of illegal prize amount area ・ Illegal prize error notification command ・ Unauthorized prize number upper limit value
-Winning mouth switch table address-Notification timer update information (permission / update)

  In the fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch to be monitored for error is checked (step S231), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S232). The fraud monitoring period is a special gaming state in which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are opened when there are two left big prize opening switches 103 and right big prize opening switches 104 as error monitoring target prize opening switches. It is a period other than.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S232; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step S233). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S233; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S242). When there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S233; YES), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S234), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example, 5) is determined (step S235). Note that the number of fraud occurrence determinations is not limited to five, for example, and can be set to a different value for each target winning opening switch. In this embodiment, the same is true for all winning opening switches. Value.

The determination number is five because, for example, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 in the open state (generally also referred to as a big prize opening) are converted to the closed state, the game ball wins a big prize. The game ball is sandwiched between the door members (in this case, the movable members 43a and 43b) of the mouth (that is, the variable winning device 35), and the game balls of the count switches (each of the two left big winning port switches 103 and the right big winning port switch 104). This is because when a prize is passed past the effective period or when noise occurs in the signal, it is not judged as illegal, and it is not illegal, but it is not easily judged as an error. For a place where the fraud monitoring condition is desired to be severe, the number of determinations may be one, for example.
If it is determined that the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step S235; NO), the process jumps to step S240 to prepare a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch. If the determined number is exceeded (step S235; YES), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud determination number (step S236), and the initial value is saved in the target fraud winning notification timer area (step S237). For example, 60000 ms is set as the initial value of the unauthorized winning notification timer.
Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S238), an illegal win occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S239), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S250). ).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S232; NO), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S240), and a winning number counter updating process (step S241) for setting a winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S242), and it is determined whether the notification timer is permitted to be updated (step S243). If the notification timer is not allowed to be updated (step S243; NO), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is permitted to be updated (step S243; YES), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S244). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.
The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one of the two left large winning port switches 103 and the right large winning port switch 104, and is subject to error monitoring. Is not permitted if the other prize opening switch is the other right large prize opening switch 104. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the variable winning device 35, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).
That is, since the error monitoring is performed with the two left big prize opening switches 103 and the right big prize opening switch 104 for the big prize opening (the variable prize winning device 35), if the timer is updated with both switches, the timer is doubled. As a result, the illegal timer times out in half of the specified time, so that the timer is updated only at the timing of one left big prize opening switch 103 that performs the monitoring process later. It is what.
Note that when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one winning port switch, update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S245). If the value is not 0 (step S245; NO), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S245; YES), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S246), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S47). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248; YES), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step S249, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S250). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248; NO), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S250).

If the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S50; YES), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step S250; NO), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S251), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S252), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.
With the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S217) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S241) in the fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning number counter updating process, it is first determined whether or not an error for stopping the game is occurring (step S261). If an error for stopping the game is occurring (step S261; YES), the winning number counter is updated. The process ends. Further, when an error for stopping the game is not occurring (step S261; NO), the number of winning-port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning-port monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning-port switch / status monitoring process (step S262). ).
Here, the information defined in the winning table in the winning port monitoring table prepared in the winning port switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
・ Data for determining the number of repetitions and input (monitoring switch bit) (defined for each switch)
・ Lower address of winning number counter area 1 (defined for each switch)
・ Lower address of winning number counter area 2 (defined for each switch)
Next, it is checked whether or not there is a detection signal input (more precisely, a change in input) from the prize-winning switch to be monitored (step S263). If it is determined that there is no input (S263; NO), the process jumps to step S272. If it is determined that there is an input (S263; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded in the next step S264. .

In the next step S265, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked in the subsequent step S266 whether it overflows. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S266; NO), the process proceeds to step S267 to save the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 and then proceeds to step S268.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S266 that a counter overflow has occurred (S266; YES), step S267 is skipped and the process jumps to step S268.
The maximum storage number (for example, 255 for the 1-byte size and 65535 for the 2-byte size) is determined depending on the size of the winning number counter area provided. , You will lose a lot of information on the number of prize balls you have to pay. In order to avoid this, in step S265, the contents of the area are not updated suddenly, and the update is performed after confirming that “+1” and “0” are not generated outside the area.
In this way, the process for the first half (definition will be described later) is performed, and the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated.

Here, the processing from step S264 to step S267 (hereinafter referred to as the first half) is to update a counter for prize balls (payout command transmission). The counter size of the first half is 2 bytes, and the range from 0 to 65535 is the maximum memory number.
On the other hand, processing from step S268 to step S271 described later (hereinafter referred to as the latter half) updates the counter for the main prize ball signal. The counter size in the latter half is 1 byte, and the range from 0 to 255 is the maximum storage number.

Returning to the flow, the processing from step S268 to step S271 (that is, the latter half of the processing) is performed. First, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S268).
Next, the process proceeds to the next step S269, where the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked whether it overflows in the subsequent step S270. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S270; NO), the process proceeds to step S271 to save the updated value in the winning number counter area 2 and then proceeds to step S272.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S270 that a counter overflow has occurred (S270; YES), step S271 is skipped and the process jumps to step S272.
In this way, the latter half of the processing is performed, and the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated.

  As described above, when it is determined in step S263 that there is no input of a detection signal from the monitored prize opening switch (more precisely, a change in input) (S263; NO), or a counter overflow has occurred in step S270 ( If it is determined that the updated value is saved in the input number counter area 2 (step S271), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S272), and the process proceeds to step S273. . In step S273, it is determined whether the monitoring process for all the switches has been completed. If the monitoring process has been completed (step S273; YES), the input number counter update process is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been completed (step S273; NO), the process returns to step S263 and the above process is repeated. With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set in the winning number counter area 1 and data for generating a main winning ball signal is set in the winning number counter area 2.

[Start port error monitoring process]
Next, the start port error monitoring process (step S215) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this start-up port error monitoring process, first, a process for detecting an abnormal winning in which a large number of winnings (for example, 25) occur within a predetermined time (for example, within 60 seconds) is performed (steps S911 to S921).
In the process for detecting this abnormal winning, first, if the starting opening prize monitoring timer for counting the predetermined time is not 0, -1 is updated (step S911), and the starting opening prize monitoring timer is 0. Is determined (step S912).
When the start opening prize monitoring timer is not 0 (step S912; NO), the process proceeds to step S917.
If the start opening prize monitoring timer is 0 (step S912; YES), an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the starting opening prize monitoring timer area (step S913), and the left, right, and middle start opening positions are saved. For each of them, the abnormal winning number area for counting the number of winnings within a predetermined time is cleared to 0 (steps S914 to S916), and the process proceeds to step S917.
Then, for each of the left, right, and middle start ports, abnormal start winning monitoring information for the corresponding switch is prepared, and then start port abnormal winning monitoring processing is performed (steps S917 to S922).

The abnormal winning monitoring information prepared in the process of preparing abnormal winning monitoring information of the corresponding switch (steps S917, S919, S921) includes the following information.
・ Bit data for monitoring switch-on ・ Commands with no start opening abnormal winning (commands differ for each start opening)
・ Starter abnormal winning prize monitoring area address (the area is different for each starter)
In addition, the start opening abnormal winning monitoring area includes an area for storing the following information.
-Status indicating whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred (set for each starting port)
・ Number of winning a prize (counted at each start)
・ Abnormal winning notification timer (independent timer for each starting port) that manages the notification time when an abnormal winning occurs

Next, as a process for detecting an abnormality based on the time that the detection state at the start port switch continues, for each of the left, right, and middle start ports, the corresponding switch ball blockage monitoring information is prepared and then the start port ball blockage is prepared. A monitoring process is performed (steps S923 to S928).
The abnormal winning monitoring information prepared in the process of preparing the ball clogging monitoring information for the corresponding switch (steps S923, S925, S927) includes the following information.
・ Bit data for monitoring switch-on ・ Commands with no start port clogging (commands differ for each start port)
・ Starter ball clogging monitoring area address (the area is different for each starter)
Further, the start opening ball clogging monitoring area includes an area for storing the following information.
-Status indicating whether or not a ball clogging has occurred (set for each start port)
・ Switch-on monitoring timer (independent timer for each starting port) that monitors the time that the detection state at the starting port switch continues
-Ball clogging alarm notification timer (independent timer for each start port) that manages the notification time when a ball clogging error occurs

  In the processes of steps S917 to S922 and the processes of steps S923 to S928, monitoring is performed in the order of left, right, and middle start port, and the priority order of error monitoring and notification is set in this order. Become.

[Starting port abnormal winnings monitoring process]
Next, the starting port abnormal winning monitoring process (steps S918, S920, S922) in the above-described starting port error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this start-port abnormal winning monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (step S931). Here, it is determined that there is an input when the rising edge of the target switch is detected.
If there is no input to the target switch (step S931; NO), the process proceeds to step S940.
If there is an input to the target switch (step S931; YES), the number of abnormal winnings at the target starting port is updated by +1 (step S932), and whether the number of abnormal winnings is less than a prescribed number (for example, 25). Determination is made (step S933).
The predetermined number set in advance is the number of times that cannot occur in a normal game, and if this number is exceeded, it is considered that some abnormality such as cheating has occurred.

When the abnormal winning number is less than the prescribed number (step S933; YES), that is, when the abnormal winning is not recognized yet, the process proceeds to step S940.
If the number of abnormal winnings is not less than the prescribed number (step S933; NO), that is, if the number of winnings within a predetermined time is equal to or greater than the prescribed value and it is recognized that an abnormally large number of winnings has occurred, The specified value is saved in the abnormal winning number area (step S934), and the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the notification timer area (abnormal winning notification timer area) of the target start port (step S935).

Next, an abnormal winning occurrence command for the target start opening is prepared (step S936), and it is determined whether the target abnormality has already occurred (step S937).
In the process of preparing the abnormal winning occurrence command for the target start opening, the target start opening prepared in the process of preparing the abnormal winning monitoring information of the corresponding switch in the start opening error monitoring process (steps S917, S919, S921). By generating an abnormal winning occurrence command using a command with no starting opening abnormal winning, an abnormal winning occurrence command for the target starting opening is prepared.
Further, in determining whether the target abnormality has already occurred (step S937), the status of the abnormal winning monitoring information of the corresponding switch is referred to, and if there is an abnormal flag (error flag), an abnormality has already occurred (starting port) It is determined that there is an abnormal winning).

If the target abnormality has already occurred (step S937; YES), the process proceeds to step S940.
If the target abnormality has not already occurred (step S937; NO), the abnormal flag is saved in the target status area (step S938), an effect command setting process is performed (step S939), and the process proceeds to step S940. To do. In this case, an abnormal winning occurrence command for the target start opening is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
In the production control device 300, based on the reception of this command, a notification is given by display or voice.

Thereafter, if the notification timer (abnormal winning notification timer) of the target start port is not 0, -1 is updated (step S940), and it is determined whether the notification timer is 0 (step S941).
If the notification timer is not 0 (step S941; NO), the start port abnormal winning monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the abnormal winning notification is continued.
If the notification timer is 0 (step S941; YES), it is determined whether the target abnormality is occurring (step S942).
If the target abnormality is not occurring (step S942; NO), the start port abnormal winning monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the abnormal winning notification is not performed from the beginning.
If the target abnormality is occurring (step S942; YES), the normal flag is saved in the target status area (step S943), an effect command setting process is performed (step S944), and the start opening abnormal prize is awarded. The monitoring process ends. In this case, the abnormal winning notification is ended, and the start of the target starting port prepared in the processing (steps S917, S919, S921) of preparing the abnormal winning monitoring information of the corresponding switch in the starting port error monitoring process is performed. The command in which no abnormal mouth winning has occurred is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
Based on the reception of this command, the production control device 300 ends the notification by display, voice, or the like.

[Starting ball clogging monitoring process]
Next, the start opening ball clogging monitoring process (steps S924, S926, S928) in the above-described start opening error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this start-up port clogging monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the target switch is on (step S951). Here, the port input state (level data) of the target switch is monitored to determine whether it is on. Note that being on means being in a detection state, that is, a metallic object including a game ball is present in the detection area of the target switch.
If the target switch is not on (step S951; NO), the switch-on monitoring timer area of the target start port is cleared to 0 (step S960), and the process proceeds to step S961.
Since the switch-on monitoring timer is for measuring the duration of the state (detection state) in which the target switch is on, it is cleared to 0 when the target switch is not on.
If the target switch is on (step S951; YES), the switch-on monitoring timer at the target start port is updated by +1 (step S952), and the value of the switch-on monitoring timer is less than a specified time (for example, 252 ms). Is determined (step S953).
The predetermined time set in advance is a time that cannot be generated in a normal game, and if it exceeds this time, it is considered that some abnormality such as an illegal act has occurred.

When the value of the switch-on monitoring timer is less than the specified time (step S953; YES), the process proceeds to step S961. In this case, no abnormality has occurred.
If the value of the switch-on monitoring timer is not less than the specified time (step S953; NO), the specified time value is saved in the switch-on monitoring timer area of the target start port (step S954), and the target start port is notified. An initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the timer area (ball clogging abnormality notification timer area) (step S955).
Thereafter, a command for generating a ball clog at the target start port is prepared (step S956), and it is determined whether the target ball clog has already occurred (step S957).

In the process for preparing a command for generating a ball clog at the target start port (step S956), the target prepared in the process for preparing the ball clogging monitoring information for the corresponding switch in the start port error monitoring process (steps S923, S925, S927) A command for generating a clogged ball at the start port is prepared by generating a command for generating a clogged ball using a command for which no clogging has occurred at the start port.
Further, in the determination of whether or not the target ball clogging has already occurred (step S957), the status of the ball clogging monitoring information of the corresponding switch is referred to. If there is an abnormal flag (error flag), the ball clogging has already occurred ( It is determined that there is a start-up ball clogging).

If the target ball clogging has already occurred (step S957; YES), the process proceeds to step S961.
If the target ball clogging has not already occurred (step S957; NO), the abnormal flag is saved in the target status area (step S958), an effect command setting process is performed (step S959), and the process goes to step S961. Transition. In this case, a command to generate a ball clog at the target start port is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Thereafter, if the notification timer (ball clogging abnormality notification timer) of the target start port is not 0, −1 is updated (step S961), and it is determined whether the notification timer is 0 (step S962).
If the notification timer is not 0 (step S962; NO), the start opening ball clogging monitoring process is terminated. In this case, notification of ball clogging is continued.
If the notification timer is 0 (step S962; YES), it is determined whether the target ball clogging is occurring (step S963).
If the target ball clogging is not occurring (step S963; NO), the start port ball clogging monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the ball clogging is not reported from the beginning.
If the target ball clogging is occurring (step S963; YES), the normal flag is saved in the target status area (step S964), an effect command setting process is performed (step S965), and the starting ball is set. The clogging monitoring process ends. In this case, the notification of the ball clogging is completed, and the ball of the target starting port prepared in the processing for preparing the ball clogging monitoring information of the corresponding switch in the starting port error monitoring process (steps S923, S925, S927). A command that is not clogged is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
From the above, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormality detection means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormality based on the time during which the detection state continues with the detection sensor (start-up switch).

According to the start port ball clogging monitoring process, it is determined that the ball is clogged when the detection state of the start port switch continues for a predetermined time or more.
As described above, when the detection state continues for a predetermined time or more, the game ball may actually be clogged, so that the game ball stays at the position of the start port switch or may be caused by an illegal act.
Examples of such an illegal act include an illegal act using a thread fishing ball.

When a game ball wins a starting opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 33a) in a normal game that is not an illegal act, a gaming ball that falls from above the starting opening flows into the starting opening.
At the time of winning, the start port switch is turned on (detected state) over a period in which the game ball passes the start port switch (for example, the left start port switch 105).
The time that the start-up switch continues to be on depends on the inflow mode of the game ball, such as whether the game ball contacts the nail or not. The game time is longer than the on-time that is assumed when the game ball wins a winning opening, and is a time that cannot occur in normal games that are not fraudulent.

An illegal act using a thread fishing ball is that a player who performs an illegal act by entering a game ball with a thread (a metal object that can be detected by the start switch even if it is not a game ball) into the game area 32. The game ball is moved up and down by operating the thread, and the start port switch is illegally turned on by repeating the state where the game ball is above the start port and the state where the game ball is in the start port It is.
The start port switch is turned on when the game ball is lowered from above the start port into the start port, and is also turned on when the game ball is pulled up from the start port to the start port.

In such a thread fishing ball operation, when the game ball is raised, the distance to which the game ball is carefully pulled to prevent the game ball from coming off from the vicinity of the starting port or when the game ball is lowered is dropped. Due to the short period of time, the time that the game ball is present at the position detected by the start opening switch becomes long, and the time that the start opening switch remains on cannot be generated in normal games. May be.
In the start port ball clogging monitoring process, it is possible to detect an illegal act such as a thread fishing ball by detecting that the detection state has continued for a specified time or longer with the start port switch.
In addition, the start opening abnormal winning monitoring process is determined to be abnormal when a large number of winnings that cannot be generated in a normal game are detected. For example, a fraudulent act such as a fishing ball that turns the start port switch on can detect a large number of winnings that cannot occur in normal games. It is possible to detect fraud such as a fishing ball.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned prescribed time, which is considered to be a ball clogging in the start-up ball clogging monitoring process, is a time that cannot be generated in a normal game that is not a fraudulent act, but rarely occurs even in a normal game. In this case, it is determined that the ball is clogged when the specified time is exceeded a plurality of times in a certain period.
In addition, the time that cannot occur in normal games is defined as the first specified time, the time that occurs rarely even in normal games is defined as the second specified time, and if the first specified time is exceeded, it is immediately incorrect. It may be determined that the second specified time is illegal if the second specified time exceeds a certain number of times.
In addition, the specified time is a long time that cannot occur in normal games that are not fraudulent, but may be a short time that cannot occur in normal games that are not fraudulent. May be determined as abnormal based on the fact that is not within a predetermined range.

In addition, the above-mentioned prescribed number regarded as abnormal in the start opening abnormal winnings monitoring process is the number of times that can not occur in normal games that are not fraudulent, but the number of times that rarely occurs in normal games In this case, an abnormality is determined when the specified value is exceeded a plurality of times within a certain period.
In addition, the number of times that can not occur in normal games is set as the first specified value, the number of times that occurs rarely in normal games is set as the second specified value, and if the first specified value is exceeded, it is immediately incorrect. It may be determined that the second specified value is illegal when it exceeds a plurality of times in a certain period.

  Further, by attaching the start port switch to the upper end of the start port or in the vicinity of the upper end (for example, an area within the radius of the game ball downward from the upper end of the start port), the game ball 57 is started when the thread fishing ball is pulled up. If the ball can be easily removed from the mouth, it will be easier to exceed the specified time because it will be lifted more carefully, and it will be easier to detect fraud by the fishing rod.

From the above, the detection sensors (the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, and the middle start port switch 107) that are in a detection state when a metallic object including the game ball is present fire the game ball. In a gaming machine that is provided in the gaming area 32 and can give a predetermined game value to a player based on the detection sensor being in a detection state, an abnormality that detects the occurrence of an abnormality based on the time that the detection state continues with the detection sensor Detection means (game control device 100) will be provided. Therefore, the abnormality of the gaming machine can be found by the detection sensor used for the game.
Further, the abnormality detection means determines that an abnormality has occurred when the time during which the detection state has been continued by the detection sensor is not within a predetermined time range. Therefore, the abnormality of the gaming machine can be found by the detection sensor used for the game.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check process (steps S220, S222, S225) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gaming machine status check process, first, a plurality of switches whose gaming machine status should be monitored and a status scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the signals to be monitored this time The state monitoring table to be acquired is acquired (step S281).
Here, the information defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process includes the following.
・ Lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area ・ Lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored ・ Mask data to extract only the bit of the target signal ・ Signal ON judgment data ・ Status Off command (in the case of error system, the meaning of the command to end error notification)
-Status on command (In case of error, it means the error notification start command)
-Status off monitoring timer comparison value-Status on monitoring timer comparison value

Next, the state of the target signal acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether the monitoring target signal is on, that is, whether the gaming machine state has changed (step S282).
If the signal is not on (step S282: NO), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S283).
Here, the state off flag prepared in step S283 will be described. The state indicated by the state off flag is an error-free (normal) state regarding the error system. On the other hand, the touch switch as the state indicated by the state off flag is a state where the touch switch is not touched.
Next, the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S284). Thereafter, a target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S285), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S289).

On the other hand, if the target signal is on (step S282: YES), there is a possibility of an error occurrence, so a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S286). For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table, if the shot ball is out, a shot ball supply switch (not shown) indicates that there is no game ball in the chute that supplies the game ball to the storage tank. If it is detected and turned on, step S282 becomes YES. If YES, the state on flag is prepared in step S286.
Here, the state on flag prepared in step S286 will be described. Regarding the error system as the state indicated by the state on flag, it is an error (abnormal or illegal) state. On the other hand, regarding the touch switch as the state indicated by the state on flag, it is the state of touching.
Next, the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S287). Thereafter, a target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S288), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S289).

If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S289; YES), that is, if the signal state has not changed, a timer is determined to determine whether error handling is necessary. The target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S292), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (a reference value for determining that an error handling is required) (step S293). ).
On the other hand, if the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step S289; NO), that is, if the signal state has changed, it is determined that no further error handling is necessary, and the target signal The current signal state is saved in the control area (step S290), the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S291), the target state monitoring timer is updated by one (step S292), and the target state monitoring timer is updated. It is determined whether the value of has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293; NO), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293: YES), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S294). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S295).
Here, when it is determined in step S293 that the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the error occurrence or release state has been confirmed. However, there are situations where it is determined that the error occurrence condition will be satisfied again when an error has already occurred, or that the error release condition will be confirmed again when no error is occurring. Therefore, after the process of step S294, in step S295, the prepared status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area to check whether the currently determined error status is the same as the current error flag status. I am doing so.

If the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S295; YES), the error status has not changed, so it is determined that no action is required, and the game The machine status check process ends. If the set status flag and the value of the target status flag area do not match (if the status flag is not the same) (step S29; NO), it means that it has changed to a new error status. The status flag is saved in the target status flag area (step S296), and the process proceeds to step S297. That is, the value of the target state flag area is changed to that of the state state that has been confirmed this time, and the process proceeds to step S297. In step S297, an effect command setting process is performed, and an effect command corresponding to the gaming machine state determined this time is set.
In this step S297, either the state off command prepared in step S284 or the state on command prepared in step S287 is transmitted. As a result, a treatment corresponding to the current gaming machine state is performed. For example, if the shot ball is out of play, the gaming machine state display notifying the user is notified or the notification is released. After step S297, the gaming machine state check process is terminated.
In this way, if a change occurs in the gaming machine state, the corresponding state flag is set to prepare a treatment effect command, and if the change in the gaming machine state is resolved, the corresponding state flag is cleared and the cancellation effect command is issued. Is set. In particular, in this gaming machine state check process, not only the change in the gaming machine state is monitored, but also the release is monitored and the process is shared.

Note that such gaming machine state check processing is the same for a change in gaming machine state such as opening of a glass frame or opening of a front frame.
In addition, if the above-mentioned commands for notifying various gaming machine states (especially on (occurrence)) are made different for each gaming machine state to be monitored, it is effective for players and hall staff. However, it is not necessary to specify the type of state, and the common commands may be used for those that have no problem even if the notification mode is common.
For example, if a dedicated notification start command is prepared when a shot ball is out, it is possible to notify “No ball in tank!” By voice or a message on the screen. Similarly, if the glass frame is open, it can be notified that “the glass frame is open!”.
If a common notification mode of notifying the player that “abnormality has occurred!” And lighting the frame decoration device 12 in red when the shot ball is broken and the glass frame is opened is used as a common command. It is only necessary to prepare an “abnormality notification start command”, which can reduce the processing burden on the production control device 300, and the information display 45 using the liquid crystal as in the first embodiment of the present invention and its modification. Even if there is a difference in the message display ability depending on the presence or absence, it can be used in common, or even if it is necessary to monitor a new type of error or the state of the gaming machine, the control program of the effect control device and the voice ROM 327 There is an advantage that there is no need to change the data.
Note that the gaming machine state and error types to which the common “abnormality notification start command” and “abnormality notification end command” are applied are not limited to those described above. Any command that can be used as a common notification mode between different gaming machines may be used.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S226) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S301). As described above, since the status scan counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3, the payout busy signal check process is executed once every four times. For example, the payout busy signal is monitored (checked) at a cycle of 16 ms. Is done.
If the payout busy signal is not on (step S301; NO), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S302), and then an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S303). For example, 32 ms is set as the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value. After step S303, the process proceeds to step S304.
On the other hand, if the payout busy signal is ON in step S301 (step S301; YES), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S305), and then an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S306). . For example, 32 ms is set as the on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value. After step S306, the process proceeds to step S304.

When the process proceeds from step S303 or step S306 to step S304, in step S304, the value of the busy signal state region is compared with the state of the current signal to determine whether they are the same. This is to check whether the same gaming machine state continues for a plurality of interrupts.
The value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal. If they are not the same (step S304; NO), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S307). In this case, if the value of the busy signal state area and the state of the current signal are not the same, the state of the busy signal has changed. For example, the state changes from the idle state to the busy state, or from the busy state to the idle state. There are changes.
Next, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero. This is to prepare for the next busy signal change. Next, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S309).
On the other hand, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the current signal state in step S304, and if they are the same (step S304; YES), the process jumps to step S309 to update the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 (step S309). ).

After step S309, it is subsequently determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has reached a monitoring timer comparison value (a reference value for determining that an error is necessary) (step S310).
Here, when it is determined in step S310 that the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the state of the busy signal is confirmed. However, there may be situations where the busy signal state is fixed when the busy signal state has already changed, or the busy signal state is fixed when the busy signal has not changed. In step S311, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value -1. In step S312, the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area.
If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S3103; NO), the payout busy signal check process is terminated.
Further, when the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S310: YES), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S311). The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S312). After step S312, the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Remaining sphere monitoring process]
Next, details of the remaining sphere monitoring process (step S68) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The remaining ball monitoring process is to monitor whether or not the game ball won in the variable winning device 35 is pulled out to the outside and remains in the variable winning device 35.
In the remaining sphere monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge port switch 1 (first remaining sphere discharge port switch 112) (step S321). The first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 detects a game ball that has flowed into the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35, and has a function of detecting whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the discharge flow path remains. Have. Therefore, the input to the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 means that the game ball is discharged to the outside from the discharge channel, and the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 detects the discharge and the signal is turned on. In this state, the game control device 100 has a detection signal input.
That is, the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 has detected that the game ball is discharged from the discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35 to the outside.

If it is determined that there is an input to the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (step S321; YES), if the remaining ball counter is not “0”, the remaining ball counter is updated by “−1” (step S322). The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 when they remain inside the variable winning device 35.
By repeating this routine, the remaining sphere counter is updated by “−1” until the remaining sphere counter becomes “0”. When the remaining ball counter becomes “0” including the input monitoring of detection signals from the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 and the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 described later, There is no remaining sphere.
Here, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are released due to the establishment of the starting condition, and the game ball flows into the variable winning device 35, the game ball that has flowed in is left left large winning port switch 103 or right large winning port. Since it is always detected by any one of the switches 104, after the detection signal input from the left big winning port switch 103 or the right big winning port switch 104 is input to the game control device 100, the first remaining ball outlet switch If it is not detected by 112 or the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 that the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 35, it can be determined that the remaining ball remains inside the variable winning device 35. The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls (remaining balls) remaining in the variable winning device 35 based on the above theory. Therefore, if the remaining ball counter = 0, the remaining ball is not staying in the variable winning device 35.

After step S322, the process proceeds to step S323. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the first remaining sphere outlet switch 112 (step S321; NO), the process skips to step S323 without updating the remaining sphere counter by -1.
If it progresses to step S323, it will be determined whether there exists any input to the discharge port switch 2 (2nd remaining ball discharge port switch 113) (step S323). The second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 is disposed below the determining device 80 in the variable winning device 35, and is a switch for detecting that the game ball has come out from the variable winning device 35. The determining device 80 It has a function of detecting whether or not game balls that have flowed into the game remain. Accordingly, the input to the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 means that the game ball is discharged from the determining device 80 to the outside, and the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects the discharge and the signal is turned on. This is a state in which the detection signal is input to the game control device 100.
That is, the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects that the game ball is discharged from the determination device 80 to the outside.

If it is determined that there is an input to the second remaining sphere outlet switch 113 (step S323; YES), if the remaining sphere counter is not “0”, the remaining sphere counter is updated by “−1” (step S324). As described above, the remaining sphere counter is updated by “−1” and the remaining sphere counter is set to “" by monitoring the detection signals from the first remaining sphere outlet switch 112 and the second remaining sphere outlet switch 113. When it becomes “0”, there is no remaining ball inside the variable winning device 35.
After step S324, the process proceeds to step S325. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the second remaining sphere outlet switch 113 (step S323; NO), the remaining sphere counter is not updated by "-1", and the process jumps to step S325.
Next, in step S325, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left big prize opening switch 103. The left big winning port switch 103 detects a game ball flowing into the variable winning device 35. Therefore, the left large winning opening switch 103 has a function of detecting that a game ball flows into the variable winning device 35. If it is determined that there is an input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step S325; YES), the remaining ball counter is updated by “+1” (step S326). This is because the left big prize opening switch 103 detects that the game ball has flowed into the variable winning device 35, so that the game ball staying inside the variable winning device 35 is counted as a remaining ball to be counted by the remaining ball counter. The remaining ball counter is incremented by “+1”.

After step S326, the process proceeds to step S327. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step S325; NO), the remaining ball counter is not updated by “+1”, and the process jumps to step S327.
Next, in step S327, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104. Similarly, the right big winning opening switch 104 detects a game ball flowing into the variable winning device 35. Accordingly, the right big prize opening switch 104 has a function of detecting that a game ball flows into the variable prize winning device 35. If it is determined that there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step S327; YES), the remaining ball counter is updated by “+1” (step S328). This is because the right big prize opening switch 104 detects that the game ball has flowed into the variable winning device 35, so that the game ball staying in the variable winning device 35 is counted as a remaining ball to be counted by the remaining ball counter. The remaining ball counter is incremented by “+1”.

After step S328, the process proceeds to step S329. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step S327; NO), the remaining ball counter is not updated by “+1”, and the process jumps to step S329.
Next, in step S329, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere counter is “0”. This is because by repeating this routine, the remaining sphere counter is updated by “−1” until the remaining sphere counter becomes “0” as will be described later. It is determined whether or not there is no remaining ball in the variable winning device 35.
If the remaining sphere counter is not “0” (step S329; NO), it is determined whether or not a remaining sphere error is occurring (step S330). The remaining ball error is a state in which an error that the remaining ball remains inside the variable winning device 35 is generated.
The processing of step S330 is performed when the remaining sphere counter is not “0” in step S329 for the first time, a remaining sphere error may have occurred. It is determined whether or not a residual sphere error has already occurred.
If a residual sphere error is occurring (step S330; YES), it is determined that a residual sphere error has already occurred by the previous routine, the routine is terminated, and the process returns. At this time, this routine is repeated until the determination in step S329 is YES, and if the determination in step S329 is YES, the process branches to step S336.

  On the other hand, if the remaining sphere error is not occurring (step S330; NO), the routine first becomes a routine in which the remaining sphere counter is not “0”, and there is a possibility that the remaining sphere error has occurred, so the process proceeds to step S331. The remaining sphere monitoring timer is updated by “−1” (step S331). This is because a game ball that plays a game inside the variable prize apparatus 35 is normally discharged from the variable prize apparatus 35 within a predetermined period. For example, some member and the inside of the variable prize apparatus 35 Since one or a plurality of game balls may be pinched in contact with the wall surface, the remaining ball monitoring timer measures the elapse of a predetermined period. For example, when the remaining sphere counter is not “0”, this routine is repeated, and even if the elapsed time of the predetermined period is measured by the remaining sphere monitoring timer, the remaining sphere counter is still not “0”. If there is, it is determined that there is a remaining ball.

Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere monitoring timer has become “0” (step S332). If the remaining sphere monitoring timer has not become “0” (step S332; NO), the routine returns and this routine is repeated. . If the remaining sphere monitoring timer becomes “0” (step S332; YES), it is determined that a remaining sphere error has occurred, a remaining sphere error in-progress flag is prepared (step S333), and the remaining sphere is detected. An error occurrence command is prepared (step S334). After step S334, the process proceeds to step S335.
On the other hand, if the remaining sphere counter is “0” (step S329; YES), it is determined that there is no remaining sphere, and the process jumps to step S336 to prepare a remaining sphere error canceling flag (step S336) and the remaining sphere. An error cancel command is prepared (step S337). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S335.

Next, in step S335, it is determined whether or not the prepared state flag is the same as the value of the remaining sphere error flag area. If the prepared state flag is the same as the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S335; YES), it is determined that there has been no change from the previous state flag, the routine is terminated, and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the prepared state flag is not the same as the value of the remaining sphere error flag region (step S335; NO), it is determined that the current state flag has changed from the previous time, and the state flag prepared this time is used as the remaining sphere error flag region. Is saved (step S338), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S339). Through the effect command setting process, the remaining sphere error occurrence command set in step S334 and the remaining sphere error cancel command set in step S337 are sent to the effect control device 300. After step S339, the routine is terminated and the process returns.

  As described above, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are released due to the establishment of the start condition, and the game ball flows into the variable winning device 35, the game ball that has flowed in is either the left big prize opening switch 103 or the right big prize. The first remaining ball discharge port switch is detected by any of the mouth switches 104 and a detection signal from the left big winning port switch 103 or the right big winning port switch 104 is input to the game control device 100. If it is not detected by 112 or the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 that the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 35, it is determined that the remaining ball remains inside the variable winning device 35, and a residual ball error occurs. When the command is sent to the production control device 300, as shown in the timer interruption process (FIG. 40), the special game is not performed during the error operation. It made. Further, when there is no remaining ball and a residual ball error cancel command is sent to the effect control device 300, the game (special game) is resumed.

[Game stop error handling]
Next, details of the game stop error process (step S69) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the game stop error process, first, it is determined whether or not the error is waiting to be released (step S348). If it is not waiting for an error release (step S348; NO), it is determined whether an error operation is in progress (step S349). If there is no error operation (step S349; NO), it is determined that there is no error operation, the routine is terminated, and the process returns. Therefore, if the error is not awaiting and the error is not in operation, no error occurs and the game is continued.
On the other hand, if an error operation is being performed (step S349; YES), the game stop error control timer is updated by "-1" (step S350). Next, it is determined whether or not the game stop error control timer has reached “0” (step S351). The game stop error control timer is for counting a certain period of time in order to stop the game for a certain period when an error occurs in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1).

Next, if the game stop error control timer is not “0” (step S351; NO), the process returns and the routine is repeated. When the game stop error control timer becomes “0” (step S351; YES), an error release waiting flag is saved in the game stop error state area (step S352).
Thereafter, it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration is in progress (step S353). If a customer waiting demonstration is in progress (step S353; YES), a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step S354), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S355), the process proceeds to step S356. If the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress (step S353; NO), the process proceeds to step S356.

Next, a game stop error release waiting command is prepared (step S356), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S357). By the effect command setting process, the game stop error release waiting command prepared in step S356 described above is sent to the effect control device 300. After step S357, the routine ends and returns.
On the other hand, if waiting for error cancellation (step S351; YES), the process branches to step S358. Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358). This is to determine whether the RAM initialization switch 127 has been operated in order to cancel the error.
If there is no input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358; NO), the routine is terminated and the process returns. If there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358; YES), a game stop error release command is prepared (step S359) and an effect command setting process is performed (step S360). By the effect command setting process, the game stop error cancel command prepared in step S359 described above is sent to the effect control device 300.

Next, the releasing flag is saved in the abnormal discharge flag area (step S361), and the abnormal discharge counter area is cleared to “0” (step S362). The abnormal discharge is an abnormality in which a larger number of game balls than the number of game balls flowing into the variable prize apparatus 35 are discharged from the variable prize apparatus 35. That is, instead of flowing in the regular route, for example, in the state where the glass frame 5 is opened, fraud such as putting a game ball directly by hand from the front of the accessory device 51 or the determining device 80 is abnormal discharge, In order to perform the monitoring, an abnormal discharge counter area, an in-release flag relating to abnormal discharge, and the like are provided. Therefore, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, a release flag relating to abnormal discharge is saved and “0” is cleared in the abnormal discharge counter area, so that the next game stop error is prepared.
Next, the releasing flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S363), and the magnet fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to “0” (step S364). For example, the magnet fraud is detected by the magnetic sensor 115. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, the release flag relating to the magnet fraud is saved and the magnet fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to “0”, which causes a game stop error due to the next magnet fraud. Provided.
Next, the releasing flag is saved in the vibration fraud flag area (step S365), and the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area is cleared to “0” (step S366). The vibration fraud is detected by the vibration sensor 116, for example. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, the cancellation flag relating to vibration fraud is saved, and “0” is cleared in the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area. Prepared for.

Next, the releasing flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S367), and the normal flag is saved in the game stop error flag area (step S368). The board radio wave fraud is detected by the board radio wave sensor 114, for example. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, a release flag related to radio wave fraud and a normal flag are saved, so that a game stop error associated with the next radio fraud is prepared. After step S368, the routine ends and returns.
In this way, in the game stop error processing, if there is an error that stops the game (such as malicious ones such as radio fraud, magnet fraud, vibration fraud, abnormal discharge, etc.), the game is stopped while the error is released Therefore, it is monitored whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 127, and an error release flag is saved to prepare for the next error.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S72) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special game process, the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, the middle start port switch 107, the left large winning port switch 103, the right large winning port switch 104, and the input monitoring of the specific area switches 80a to 80d, Control of the entire process related to the special figure variation game, etc., and setting of display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the special game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process is performed (step S371). In the start port switch monitoring process, winnings to the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, and the middle start port switch 107 are monitored. The game result prior determination is performed in advance to determine the game result based on the winning in advance before the start of the special figure variation game based on the winning.
Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S372) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104 provided in the variable winning device 35 is performed.
Next, a specific area switch monitoring process (step S373) is performed. In this specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls by specific area switches 80a to 80d provided in the determining device 80 of the variable winning device 35 is monitored, and a process for setting an effect command is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step S374). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step S375). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step S375; YES), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step S376), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step S377). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step S378).

If the special figure game process number is “0” in step S378, a power-on operation process is performed (step S379). In the power-on operation process, as the power is turned on, the accessory motor (the drum accessory motor 66, the V movable accessory motor 73) in the accessory device 51 and the accessory motor (round lottery accessory motor 88) in the determination device 80 are initialized. A process such as returning to a position is performed so that a game can be started.
In step S378, when the special figure game process number is “1”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step S380) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
When the special figure game process number is “2” in step S378, the special figure changing process for setting the special figure stop display time, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step S381) is performed.

In step S378, when the special figure game process number is “3”, special figure display processing (for example, setting information necessary for performing the small hit release operation corresponding to the game result of the special figure variation game) Step S382) is performed.
If the special figure game process number is “4” in step S378, a small hit opening process (step S383) for executing a setting process related to the big winning opening in the small hit is performed.
In step S378, if the special figure game process number is “5”, the remaining balls won in the big prize opening (referring to the variable prize winning device 35; hereinafter the same) during the small hitting process are discharged. The small hit remaining sphere process (step S384) is performed for setting the time for this, and setting the information necessary for performing the small hit end process.
In step S378, if the special figure game process number is “6”, a small hit end process (step S385) for setting information necessary to end the small hit and perform fanfare / interval processing is performed. .
In step S378, when the special figure game process number is “7”, it is necessary to perform processing related to the fanfare / interval such as setting of the big winning opening opening time value corresponding to the opening information of the big winning opening and the number of rounds. A fanfare / inter-interval process (step S386) is executed to set various information.

In step S378, when the special figure game process number is “8”, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command setting process or a big hit end process is performed. For this purpose, a special winning opening opening process (step S387) for performing a process for setting information necessary for this is performed.
In step S378, if the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for forcibly ending the period for waiting for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged (the big winning opening remaining ball processing period) Then, a big winning opening remaining ball process (step S388) is performed for performing a process for setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.
In step S378, if the special figure game process number is “10”, a big hit end process (step S389) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is performed.

Then, after preparing the table (special figure 1 fluctuation control table) for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 in the collective display apparatus 50 (step S390), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process which concerns on the special figure 1 of the collective display apparatus 50 ( Step S391) is performed. Next, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the collective display device 50 (the special figure 2 fluctuation control table) (step S392), the symbol fluctuation control process according to the special figure 2 of the collective display device 50 ( Step S393) is performed. Next, an accessory solenoid control process is performed (step S393), and the special figure game process is terminated. In the accessory solenoid control process, the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 for driving the rear end side of the floor 61 in the accessory device 51 up and down is controlled, and information (floor 61 and the drum component 62 are processed to produce the information) that tells the timing when the gap becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step S375 (step S375; NO), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step S390 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

Here, the small win is the opening of the large winning opening when the winning winning opening (all starting winning openings of the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b and the second starting winning opening 34) is won (the variable winning device 35). The operation from the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize-winning device 35 to the game ball passing through the specific area and winning V. However, if the V prize is not won, all the opening operations are completed until the small hitting ending time elapses.
Accordingly, all the (lottery) results of the special figure variation display game are small hits. Per 5R and 8R are not small hits, but indicate types of big hits.
Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in a special figure variation game (V winning, that is, a game ball passes through a specific area). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 35 as an electric accessory is set (the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S371) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 57, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a left start port (first start winning port 33a) winning monitor table is prepared (step S401), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S402) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning at the first start winning opening 33a (step S403).
If it is determined in step S403 that there is no winning in the first start winning opening 33a (step S403; NO), the process proceeds to step S405, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S403 that there is a prize at the first start winning opening 33a (step S403; YES), special figure 1 starting opening switch processing is performed (step S404). The special figure 1 start opening switch process is a process related to the start winning such as extraction of a special symbol random number accompanying the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 33a. After step S404, the process proceeds to step S405.
Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not provided with so-called ordinary electric power or ordinary figure, so that there is no general electric power support for the start winning prize.

In step S405, the same process as the process for monitoring the winning at the first start winning opening 33a described above is sequentially executed for the first starting winning opening 33b (right start opening).
That is, a winning start table for the right starting port (first starting winning port 33b) is prepared (step S405), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S406) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the first starting winning port 33b. Is determined (step S407).
If it is determined in step S407 that there is no winning at the first start winning opening 33b (step S407; NO), the process proceeds to step S409, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S407 that there is a prize at the first start winning opening 33b (step S407; YES), special figure 1 starting opening switch processing is performed (step S408). The special figure 1 start port switch process is the same process as step S404 described above. After step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

In step S409, the same process as the process for monitoring the winning at the first start winning opening 33a described above is sequentially executed for the second starting winning opening 34 (medium start opening).
That is, a winning start monitoring table for the middle start opening (second start winning opening 34) is prepared (step S409), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S410) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second start winning opening 34. Is determined (step S411).
If it is determined in step S411 that there is no winning in the second start winning opening 34 (step S411; NO), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S411 that there is a prize at the second start winning opening 34 (step S411; YES), special figure 2 starting opening switch processing is performed (step S412). The special figure 2 start opening switch processing is a process related to the start winning such as extraction of a special symbol random number in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 34. After step S412, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps S402, S406, S410) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, of the first start winning ports (left starting port, right starting port) 33a, 33b and the second starting winning ports (medium start port) 34, the monitoring target is selected. Information on no winning at the start port is set (step S421), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the first start winning ports 33a and 33b and the second start winning port 34 ( Step S422). Then, if there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A422; NO), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step S422; YES), the random number latch register status is read (step S423), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424; NO), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424; YES), the fluctuation pattern random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step S425). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how the special display variation is displayed on the collective display device 50. Next, among the first start winning ports 33a and 33b and the second start winning port 34, the winning information of the monitoring target start port is set (step S426), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Start Switch Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 start port switch process (steps S404 and S408) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 1 start opening switch process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input to the first start winning award (left start opening, right start opening) 33a, 33b.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the special figure 1 start port switch passing process, first, of the first start winning ports (left start port, right start port) 33a, 33b, the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch Is loaded with the number of times of starting port 1 signal output, which is the number of times information related to the output to the management device outside the pachinko machine 1 (step S431), and the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S432). Is determined to overflow (step S433).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S433; NO), the updated value is saved in the start port 1 signal output number area of the RWM (step S434), and the process proceeds to step S435. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step S433; YES), the process proceeds to step S435.
In this embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port 1 signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by updating “+1”, and it is determined that the output count overflows. Therefore, if the looped and loaded value becomes “0”, it is determined that the number of outputs overflows, so that the saving is not performed.

If it progresses to step S435, it will be determined whether it is processing normally, and if it is not processing normally (step S435; NO), a special figure 1 start port switch process will be complete | finished. During normal processing, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and production setting of the special figure fluctuation game, the setting of information necessary to perform the special figure fluctuation processing, the customer waiting production, etc. It is carried out.
On the other hand, if the process is normally in progress (step S435; YES), it is determined whether or not there is a hold in FIG. 2 (step S436).
Here, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening), only one special figure is held (holding of special figure 2). On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first start opening), the special figure is not held (the special figure 1 is not held). Only in the special figure 2, only one special figure is displayed on hold.

If there is a hold in the special figure 2 (step S436; YES), the special figure 1 start port switch process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is no suspension in FIG. 2 (step S436; NO), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S437). The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 when they remain inside the variable winning device 35.
If the remaining ball counter is not “0” (step S437; NO), the special figure 1 start port switch process is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S437; YES), it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S438). The special figure 1 start opening winning flag is set (set) when a winning is made in one of the first starting winning openings (left start opening, right start opening) 33a, 33b. In step S438, the special figure 1 start opening prize flag is determined because the special figure 1 start opening prize flag is the start of one of the first start winning openings (left start opening, right start opening) 33a, 33b. This is because it is determined whether or not a game ball has already won a prize opening.

If there is a special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S438; YES), a game ball has already been won at one of the first starting winning openings (left start opening, right start opening) 33a, 33b. Then, it is determined that the special figure 1 start opening prize flag is set, and it is not necessary to set the special figure 1 start opening prize flag again, so the special figure 1 start opening switch process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is no special figure 1 start opening prize flag (step S438; NO), it is necessary to set the special figure 1 start opening prize flag in accordance with the current start winning, so the process proceeds to step S439 and the special figure 1 start is started. Set the mouth prize flag.
Next, the fluctuation pattern random number prepared in step S425 in the hard random number acquisition process described above is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step S440). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how the special display variation is displayed on the collective display device 50. Next, the special symbol random number is extracted (step S441), and the extracted special symbol random number is saved in the special symbol 1 random number storage area of the RWM (step S442). After step S442, the special figure 1 start port switch process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Start Switch Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 start port switch process (step S412) in the start port switch monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 2 start opening switch process is a process performed when there is an input to the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening).

As shown in FIG. 60, in the special figure 2 start opening switch passing process, first, information on the number of winnings to the monitored start opening switch among the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening) is displayed. 1 is loaded (step S451), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S452), and whether the output count overflows is loaded. Determination is made (step S453).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S453; NO), the updated value is saved in the start port 2 signal output number area of the RWM (step S454), and the process proceeds to step S455. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step S453; YES), the process proceeds to step S455.
In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port 2 signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by updating “+1”, and it is determined that the output count overflows. Therefore, if the looped and loaded value becomes “0”, it is determined that the number of outputs overflows, so that the saving is not performed.

If it progresses to step S455, it will be determined whether the special figure 2 pending | holding number is less than an upper limit. As described above, in this embodiment, only the special figure 2 is displayed, and only one special figure hold display is performed. Therefore, the upper limit value of the special figure 2 hold number = 1.
If the special figure hold count is not less than the upper limit value (step S455; NO), the special figure 2 start port switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is less than the upper limit (step S455; YES), the special figure 2 hold number to be updated is updated by "+1" (step S456), and the special figure 2 hold number is handled. A decoration hold number command is prepared (step S457). The decoration hold number is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 displays the hold number in FIG. 2 as the decoration hold number. In this case, there can only be a decoration hold number command with the hold number = 1. In addition, by the light emission aspect of the light emitting members for decoration (LED etc.) provided in the decoration member (the member for decoration arrange | positioned around the 2nd start prize winning opening 34) which comprises the 2nd start winning prize opening 34, You may make it alert | report that there is the special figure 2 hold number.
Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step S458). As a result, the decoration hold number command is sent to the effect control device 300 and the information display unit 45 displays the hold number in FIG. 2 as the decoration hold number.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random number prepared in step S425 in the hard random number acquisition process described above is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step S459). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how the special display variation is displayed on the collective display device 50. Then, the special symbol random number is extracted (step S460), and the extracted special symbol random number is saved in the special symbol 2 symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S461). After step S461, the special figure 2 start port switch process is terminated.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S372) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 61, in the special prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step S471). The left big winning port switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51. If there is an input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step S471; YES), the process proceeds to step S472 and the big prize opening count update process is performed. The big prize opening count is to count the game balls that have flowed into the variable prize winning device 35 (that is, the big prize winning opening) when the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable prize winning device 35 are opened. Therefore, if there is an input to the left big winning opening switch 103 (step S471; YES), the big winning opening count is updated by "+1". After step S472, the process proceeds to step S473. On the other hand, if there is no input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step S471; NO), the process jumps to step S473.

In step S473, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104. The right big prize opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable prize winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the accessory device 51. If there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step S473; YES), the process proceeds to step S474 to perform the big prize mouth count update process. Accordingly, if there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step S473; YES), the big prize mouth count is updated by "+1". After step S474, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is no input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step S473; NO), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Large winnings count update process]
Next, details of the big prize opening count update process (steps S472 and S474) in the above-described big prize mouth switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 62, in the big prize opening count update process, first, when the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable prize winning device 35 are opened, the game balls that have flowed into the variable prize winning device 35 (that is, the big prize winning mouth) Load the number-of-award winning component signal output count, which is the number of times that information related to the number of winnings to the left big winning port switch 103 and the right big winning port switch 104 is output to the management device outside the pachinko machine 1 ( In step S481, the loaded value is updated by “+1” (step S482). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of winning prize signal output times overflows (step S473).
When the number of winning prize signal output times does not overflow (step S483; NO), the updated value is saved in the bonus winning signal output count area of the RWM (step S484), and the process proceeds to step S485. . On the other hand, in the case where the number of outputs of the prize winning number signal overflows (step S483; YES), the process proceeds to step S485.
In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the prize winning signal output count area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by updating “+1”, and it is determined that the number of winning prize signal output times overflows. Therefore, if the looped and loaded value becomes “0”, it is determined that the number of times the prize winning signal is output overflows, so that the saving is not performed.

When the processing proceeds to step S485, it is determined whether or not a big winning opening opening process is being performed, which is a process in the special-purpose game process for releasing the variable winning device 35 as a big winning opening. This is to determine whether or not the process is in a state where the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 serving as a big winning opening are easily opened to accept a game ball.
In the present embodiment, the variable prize winning device 35 corresponds to a so-called big prize opening. Therefore, the variable prize winning device 35 is referred to as a big prize winning opening, and the large winning opening is opened while the movable members 43a and 43b are open in the variable prize winning device 35. This is referred to as medium.
If it is not in the process of opening the big prize opening (step S485; NO), the process proceeds to step S486, and if it is in the process of opening the big prize opening (step S485; YES), the process jumps to step S489. When the processing proceeds to step S486, it is determined whether or not a large winning opening (variable winning device 35) is in the process of remaining balls. This is a process in the special-purpose game process for monitoring whether or not the game ball that has won the variable winning device 35 as a big winning opening passes outside and remains in the variable winning device 35. It is determined whether or not a special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress.
If the winning prize remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S486; NO), the process proceeds to step S487, and if the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress (step S486; YES), the process jumps to step S489.

In step S487, it is determined whether the small hit release process is being performed. This is a big hit (16R big hit, per 8R or per 5R) when a game ball falls on a specific area of the determining device 80 in the big prize opening (variable prize winning device 35). The movable members 43a and 43b in the big prize opening (variable prize winning device 35) are small hits in the start game by the small hits associated with winning in the prize winning openings 33a and 33b and the second start winning opening 34). It is determined whether or not the small hit release process is being performed in the special figure game process in a state where the game ball is easily opened and can be received.
If the small hit release process is not in progress (step S487; NO), the process proceeds to step S488. If the small hit release process is in progress (step S487; YES), the process jumps to step S489.

In step S488, it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed. This is because, when a small hit occurs and the starting game is being performed, the game ball that has won the big winning opening (variable winning device 35) goes out to the outside and remains in the variable winning device 35 inside. It is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball process, which is a process in the special figure game process for monitoring whether or not the game is being performed, is being performed.
If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S487; NO), the big prize winning count update processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step S487; YES), the process proceeds to step S489.
In step S489, a special winning mouth count command is prepared. This is because, when the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 serving as the big winning opening are opened, the left big winning port switch 103 for counting the game balls flowing into the variable winning device 35 (that is, the big winning port) and A command is prepared for outputting information related to the number of winnings to the right big winning opening switch 104 to the effect control device 300. Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step S490). As a result, the command prepared in step S489 is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect such as displaying the number of winning game balls to the big prize opening on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. Will be displayed.

After step S490, it is then determined whether or not the big winning opening (variable winning device 35) is being opened (step S491). If it is not in the process of opening the big prize opening (step S491; NO), the process proceeds to step S492. If the process in the process of opening the big prize opening is being performed (step S491; YES), the process branches to step S493.
In step S492, it is determined whether the small hit release process is being performed. If the small hit release processing is not in progress (step S492; NO), the big prize opening count update processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the small hit release process is being performed (step S492; YES), the process proceeds to step S493.
In step S493, the winning prize count is updated by “+1”. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of winning prize counts is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, “9”) (step S494).
When the number of winning prizes is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step S494; NO), the winning prize count update process is terminated. Also, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (step S494; YES), the special winnings game processing timer area is cleared to “0” while keeping the number of winning prizes at the upper limit (step S494). S495), the process proceeds to step S496.

In step S496, the upper limit value is loaded from the middle process control pointer upper limit value area per special figure, and the value loaded in the middle process control pointer area per special figure is saved (step S497). After step S497, the big prize opening count update process is terminated.
Here, the processing of step S497 is performed because the winning prize opening count number reaches the upper limit value, and the opening / closing operation of the winning prize opening during the round (that is, the opening / closing operation of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning prize device 35). Thus, in order to forcibly terminate the opening / closing operation (for example, 18 opening / closing operations at the maximum), the value of the mid-process control pointer for the special figure being controlled is rewritten to the upper limit value at which the operation ends.
As the upper limit value, “any one of 0, 2, and 54” is set depending on the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Along with the timer clear in step S495, the process for closing the special winning opening is immediately performed (after returning to the special figure game process).

[Specific area switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the specific area switch monitoring process (step S373) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 63, in the specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area is valid (step S501). Specific area switches 80a to 80d that detect game balls that have passed through the specific area are arranged inside the variable winning device 35. When the specific area switches 80a to 80d detect that the game balls have passed through the specific area, The jackpot is confirmed as the V prize, and the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are operated.
Even if such specific area switches 80a to 80d are illegally passed through the game ball, it is not recognized as a regular V prize, so the game ball has passed through the specific area switches 80a to 80d only under certain conditions. The conditions for authorizing a case as a regular V prize are as follows.
The special figure game process number is a process for releasing a small hit and the special figure game process number is a small hit remaining ball process. When the game ball passes through the specific area switches 80a to 80d while the specific area is valid, it is recognized as a regular V prize.

If the specific area is not valid (step S501; NO), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the specific area is valid (step S511; YES), it is determined whether or not the game ball has already passed through the specific area (step S502). If the game ball has already passed through the specific area (step S502; YES), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the specific area (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d) (step S503).
The presence of input to the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d) means that a fourth specific area switch 80d for detecting a game ball that has passed through the fourth specific area is arranged inside the variable prize apparatus 35. When the fourth specific area switch 80d detects that the game ball has passed through the fourth specific area and the signal is turned on, the detection control signal is input to the game control device 100.
That is, the fourth specific area switch 80d detects that the game ball has passed through the fourth specific area. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the fourth specific area (specific area 4), it becomes “16R big hit” as shown in FIG.

If there is an input to the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d) (step S503; YES), the big opening opening information corresponding to the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d), the round number upper limit value, A round display LED pointer is set (step S510), and the process proceeds to step S511.
On the other hand, if there is no input to the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d) (step S503; NO), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c).
The presence of input to the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c) means that a third specific area switch 80c for detecting a game ball that has passed through the third specific area is arranged inside the variable winning device 35, When the third specific area switch 80c detects that the game ball has passed through the third specific area and the signal is turned on, the detection control signal 100 is input to the game control device 100.
In other words, the third specific area switch 80c detects that the game ball has passed the third specific area. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third specific area (specific area 3), it becomes “16R big hit” as shown in FIG.

If there is an input to the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c) (step S504; YES), the big opening opening information corresponding to the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c), the round number upper limit value, A round display LED pointer is set (step S510), and the process proceeds to step S511.
On the other hand, if there is no input to the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c) (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b).
The presence of input to the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b) means that a second specific area switch 80b for detecting a game ball that has passed through the second specific area is arranged inside the variable winning device 35, When the second specific area switch 80b detects that the game ball has passed through the second specific area and the signal is turned on, the detection control signal is input to the game control device 100.
That is, the second specific area switch 80b detects that the game ball has passed through the second specific area. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the second specific area (specific area 2), as shown in FIG. 96, the stop symbol pattern set at the start of the special figure variation display game is “special figure 1”. If it is any one of “Stop Pattern 1”, “Special Figure 1 Stop Pattern 2”, “Special Figure 2 Stop Pattern 1” and “Special Figure 2 Stop Pattern 2”, it will be “per 8R” In the case of either “Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 3” or “Special Figure 2 Stop Symbol Pattern 3”, it becomes “16R big hit”.

If there is an input to the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b) (step S505; YES), the big opening opening information corresponding to the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b), the round number upper limit value, A round display LED pointer is set (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508.
On the other hand, if there is no input to the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b) (step S505; NO), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a).
The presence of input to the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) means that a first specific area switch 80a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the first specific area is arranged inside the variable winning device 35, When the first specific area switch 80a detects that the game ball has passed through the first specific area and the signal is turned on, the detection control signal is input to the game control device 100.
That is, the first specific area switch 80a detects that the game ball has passed through the first specific area. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the first specific area (specific area 1), as shown in FIG. 96, the stop symbol pattern set at the start of the special figure variation display game is “special figure 1”. If it is any one of “Stop Pattern 1”, “Special Figure 1 Stop Pattern 2”, “Special Figure 2 Stop Pattern 1”, and “Special Figure 2 Stop Pattern 2”, it will be “per 5R” In the case of either “Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 3” or “Special Figure 2 Stop Symbol Pattern 3”, it becomes “16R big hit”.

If there is no input to the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) (step S506; NO), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) (step S506; YES), the big opening opening information corresponding to the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a), the upper limit of the number of rounds The value and the round display LED pointer are set (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508.
In step S508, it is determined whether or not the “16R big hit” is a fixed symbol pattern. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, when the stop symbol pattern is either “special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern 3” or “special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern 3”, stop “16R big hit” confirmation. It is determined that the pattern is a pattern.
In the case of the stop symbol pattern of “16R big hit” fixed (step S508; YES), instead of the round number upper limit value and the round display LED pointer set in step S507, the 16R round number upper limit value and the round display LED pointer are set. Is set (step S509), and the process proceeds to step S511.
On the other hand, if the stop symbol pattern is not “16R big hit” confirmed (step S508; NO), the process proceeds to step S511 without changing the round number upper limit value and the round display LED pointer set in step S507.

In step S511, the passage presence information corresponding to the specific area switch is saved in the specific area passage flag area (step S511).
Next, the set special winning opening opening information, the round number upper limit value, and the round display LED pointer are saved in each area (step S512), and a specific area passing command corresponding to the specific area switch is prepared (step S513). Command setting processing is performed (step S514). As a result, when the game ball passes through a specific area inside the variable winning device 35, the specific area switches 80a to 80d detect it, and a specific area passing command is prepared and sent to the effect control apparatus 300. As a result of the control of the effect control device 300 being displayed on the information display 45 such that V is won (in addition, decoration of the board decoration device 351), the player is notified.

Next, a signal related to the start of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step S515). “Signal regarding start of jackpot” here is “condition device operating signal ON”, “actual equipment continuous operating device operating signal ON”, “condition device operating area 1 valid signal OFF”, Continuous actuator operating region 1 valid signal off ".
Next, a signal related to the start of jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step S516). Here, the “signal regarding the start of the big hit” is “one signal for the big hit turned on”.
Next, it is determined whether or not the number of big hits 2 is 0 (step S518).
If the number of times of the big hit 2 is not 0 (step S518; NO), that is, the special game state is generated again by executing the special figure variation display game within the specified number of times (here, 10 times) from the end of the previous special game state. In the case of continuous big hit, which is a case, a signal related to the continuous big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step S519). Here, the “signal related to continuous big hit” is “two big hit signals on” or the like. Next, the number of consecutive big hits is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step S520), and the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the number of times of big hit control is 0 (step S518; YES), that is, when it is not continuous big hit, the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Special figure power-on operation processing]
Next, details of the special figure power-on operation process (step S379) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure power-on operation process is executed only when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
As shown in FIG. 64, in the special figure power-on operation process, first, all the motors (that is, the drum accessory motor 66, the V movable accessory motor 73, and the round lottery accessory motor 88) finish the power-on operation. It is determined whether or not (step S521). In step S521, an initialization operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) (see FIG. 31A), an initialization operation of the drum accessory 62 (see FIG. 31B), and a round lottery accessory ( When the initialization operation of the determination device 80) (see FIG. 31C) has been completed, it is determined that all the motors have completed the power-on operation.
If it is determined that all the motors have finished the power-on operation (step S521; YES), the process proceeds to step S522.

Here, if the initialization operation of the V movable combination (V movable member 77), the drum combination 62, and the round lottery combination (decision device 80) has been completed, each combination stops at the initial position. Judge that Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the normal process of the special figure game can be started, and the processes after step S522 are executed.
In this embodiment, three accessory motors are arranged, which are a drum accessory motor 66, a V movable accessory motor 73, and a round lottery accessory motor 88. As described above, the special figure power-on operation process is executed only when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the confirmation setting that the accessory (determining device 80) is at the initial position is completed and it is stopped at the initial position, the routine processing of the special figure game is started. Therefore, when the determination in step S521 is YES, the confirmation setting that the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery accessory (decision device 80) are in the initial positions is completed. Judging.
Without such processing, the game game proceeds with the V movable combination (V movable member 77), the drum combination 62, and the round lottery combination (decision device 80) not in the normal position (initial position). This is because it may start. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the initial position setting for the V movable combination (V movable member 77), the drum combination 62, and the round lottery combination (decision device 80) is not completed, the special game starts. Because there is no, there is a merit that can be immediately recognized if there is a problem.

If the determination in step S521 is YES, the process proceeds to step S522, where the value of the normal M1 operation is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S522), and “0” is cleared in the M1 control timer area (step S523). Here, “M1” refers to the V movable accessory motor 73, and “M1 normal operation” corresponds to the normal operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77).
Next, the M2 normal operation value is saved in the M2 control pointer area (step S524), and the M2 control timer area is cleared to “0” (step S525). Here, “M2” is the drum accessory motor 66, and “M2 normal operation” corresponds to the normal operation of the drum accessory 62.
Next, the M3 normal operation value is saved in the M3 control pointer area (step S526), and the M3 control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S527). Here, “M3” refers to the round lottery accessory motor 88, and “M3 normal operation” corresponds to the normal operation of the round lottery accessory (decision device 80).

Next, “1” is set as the processing number of the special figure game (step S528). As a result, next time, the process shifts to the special figure normal processing. Next, the number (here, “1”) set in step S528 is saved in the special figure game process number area (step S529). After step S529, the special figure power-on operation process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-on operation has not been completed for all the motors (step S521; NO), the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery accessory (determined) Since the device 80) is not in the initial position and the initial position confirmation setting is not completed, the special-figure power-on operation process is terminated in either case. Therefore, in this case, the process does not shift to the special figure normal processing of the special figure game.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the special game is not started unless the initial position setting of the V movable combination (V movable member 77), the drum combination 62, and the round lottery combination (decision device 80) is completed. Since the special figure does not shift to normal processing, the V movable accessory (V movable member 77), the drum accessory 62, and the round lottery accessory (decision device 80) can always be operated from an accurate initial position. A stable game game can be provided to both the player and the game store.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (step S380) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 65, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere counter is “0” (step S531). The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 when they remain inside the variable winning device 35.
If the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S531; YES), it is determined that a normal game game can be started immediately because no game ball remains in the variable winning device 35, and in step S532. It is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 start opening prize flag. If there is the special figure 1 start opening prize flag (step S532; YES), it is determined that the game ball has won any of the first start winning openings 33a and 33b, and the start condition of the special figure 1 is satisfied, and step S538. Branches to, and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed. Thereby, the variable display game of FIG. 1 is started by the collective display device 50. After step S538, the special figure routine processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is no special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S532; NO), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step S533). This is to determine whether or not there is such a hold since only one hold is permitted when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 34. If the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” (step S533; YES), there is a special figure 2 hold, and then the special figure 2 hold number is updated by “−1” (step S534).
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step S535), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S536). Thereby, the decoration special figure reservation number command is sent to the effect control apparatus 300, and the effect display relating to the decoration special figure is performed on the information display 45 as a gaming state under the control of the effect control apparatus 300.
Next, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is performed (step S537). As a result, the variable display game of FIG. 2 is started by the collective display device 50. After step S537, the special figure routine processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not “0” (step S531; NO), it is determined that the normal game game cannot be started immediately because the game ball remains in the variable winning device 35, Jump to step S539.
In addition, when the special figure 2 hold number is “0” in step S533 (step S533; NO), it is determined that there is no special figure 2 hold, so that it is not possible to start the game game accompanying the start winning, Jump to S539.
In step S539, it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started. If the customer waiting demo has not started (step S539; NO), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S539). S540).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step S541), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S542). Thus, the customer waiting demonstration command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display relating to the customer waiting demonstration is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. After step S542, the process proceeds to step S543.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started (step S539; YES), the process jumps to step S543.

In step S543, “1” is set as the process number (step S543), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “1” is saved) (step S544), and the special figure is usually displayed. The process ends.
In this way, by checking the number of reserved special figure 2 that is permitted to be held, if the number of reserved special figure 2 is not “0”, an effect display regarding the decorative special figure is performed on the information display 45. Then, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S537) is executed.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step S538) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game.
It should be noted that the first special figure variation display game is the special figure 1 among the LED segments in the collective display device 50 when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first starting opening). It is a variable display game played by the special figure 1 display to display.
As shown in FIG. 66 (a), first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step S551). The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S552) related to the setting of the FIG. 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Next, a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed (step S553), and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Is performed (step S554).
Next, “2” is set as the process number (step S555), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “2” is saved) (step S556).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step S557), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S558). As a result, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is turned on. Next, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step S559), and the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step S560). As a result, the variable display game of FIG. 1 is started by the collective display device 50, and the blinking control of FIG. 1 is performed.
Next, the special figure 1 start opening winning flag is cleared (step S561), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step S537) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (b).
The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game.
The second special figure variation display game is a special figure 2 of the LED segments in the collective display device 50 when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening). It is a variable display game played by the special figure 2 display.
As shown in FIG. 66 (b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step S571). The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S572) related to the setting of the stop symbol (design information) in FIG. Next, a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed (step S573), and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. Is performed (step S574).
Next, “2” is set as the process number (step S575), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “2” is saved) (step S576).

  Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step S577), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S578). As a result, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is turned on. Next, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step S579), and the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step S580). Accordingly, the collective display device 50 starts the variable display game of FIG. 2 and the flashing control of FIG. 2 is performed. After step S580, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S552) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is a process for setting the stop symbol (symbol information) of the special figure 1.
As shown in FIG. 67 (a), first, a random number for determining the stop symbol of FIG. 1 is loaded from the special symbol 1 symbol random number storage area (step S591), "Is cleared (step S592). Next, a small hit symbol table is set (step S593), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired, and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step S594). By this process, one of 50 symbol numbers from 0 to 49 is selected.

Next, a special symbol 1 small hit stop symbol information table is set (step S595), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S596). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol in the special symbol 1 display that displays the special symbol 1 among the LED segments in the collective display device 50. In the special figure fluctuation display game, only one of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is changed (that is, special figure 1 and special figure 2 do not change simultaneously), so the area for storing the stop symbol pattern is a special figure. Both 1 and special figure 2 are common in the stop symbol pattern area, and are the same area (see step S616 described later).
Next, the small hitting motion determination information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the small hitting motion determination information area (step S597). The small hitting motion determination information is information for determining whether to perform a small hitting operation of opening once or twice.

Next, the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening information area (step S598). The big winning opening information is information for determining whether to control the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the big winning opening (variable winning device 35) corresponding to any hit operation of 16R big hit, 8R per 5R. .
Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S599), and the prepared decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S600). It should be noted that the decorative special figure command prepared in step S599 is distinguished so that it can be determined which of the special symbols 1 or 2 is the stop symbol pattern.
Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step S601). As a result, the decoration special figure command is sent to the production control apparatus 300, and the production display corresponding to the decoration special figure command related to the special figure 1 is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the production control apparatus 300. become. After step S601, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S572) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is a process for setting the stop symbol (symbol information) of the special figure 2.
As shown in FIG. 67B, first, a random number for determining the stop symbol of special figure 2 is loaded from the special figure 2 symbol random number storage area (step S611), and the special figure 2 symbol random number storage area is set to "0". "Is cleared (step S612). Next, a small hit symbol table is set (step S613), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired, and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step S614). By this process, one of 50 symbol numbers from 0 to 49 is selected.

Next, a special symbol 2 small hit stop symbol information table is set (step S615), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S616). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol 2 display for displaying the special symbol 2 among the LED segments in the collective display device 50. In the special figure fluctuation display game, only one of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is changed (that is, special figure 1 and special figure 2 do not change simultaneously), so the area for storing the stop symbol pattern is a special figure. Both 1 and special figure 2 are common in the stop symbol pattern area, and are the same area (same as step S596 described above).
Next, the small hitting motion determination information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the small hitting motion determination information area (step S617). The small hitting motion determination information is information for determining a small hitting motion that is opened twice.

Next, the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening information area (step S618). The big winning opening information is information for determining whether to control the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the big winning opening (variable winning device 35) corresponding to any hit operation of 16R big hit, 8R per 5R. .
Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S619), and the prepared decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S620). It should be noted that the decorative special figure command prepared in step S619 is distinguished so that it can be determined which stop symbol pattern is special figure 1 or special figure 2.
Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step S621). As a result, the decoration special figure command is sent to the effect control apparatus 300, and the effect display corresponding to the decoration special figure command related to the special figure 2 is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control apparatus 300. become. After step S611, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (steps S553 and S573) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
The variation pattern setting process sets a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game.
Note that the variation pattern is not limited to the example as in the present embodiment. For example, the first half variation pattern which is a variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state, and the special figure variation display after the reach state is reached. It may consist of the latter half variation pattern that is the variation mode until the end of the game, and the first half variation pattern may be set after the latter half variation pattern is set first.
As shown in FIG. 68, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group address table is set (step S631). Next, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag and the stop symbol pattern is acquired and prepared (step S632).

Next, a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number storage area and prepared (step S633). The loaded random number (variation pattern random number) is a random number for determining the variation pattern of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 by lottery. Next, “0” is cleared in the target variation pattern random number storage area (step S634).
In the variation pattern setting process, random number loading from the target variation pattern random number storage area and “0” clearing of the target variation pattern random number storage area may be performed separately as in the flow of this embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed at once using an exchange command. In the case of performing all at once, for example, a register to be loaded is set to “0” in advance, and processing such as exchanging each other is performed. Such a deformation process is not limited to the application to the processes of steps S633 and S634 in the variation pattern setting process, but can be applied to a process in which information is loaded into an area and information is cleared.

Next, a 2-byte sorting process is performed (step S635). The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the variation pattern number of the special figure variation display game from the variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number.
Next, the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (step S636). By this processing, the variation pattern of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is set based on the fluctuation pattern number. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern that is a game execution mode.
After step S636, the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps S554 and S574) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process and special figure 2 change start process will be described with reference to FIG.
The variation start information setting process is for setting variation start information in the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game.
As shown in FIG. 69, in the change start information setting process, a change time value table is set (step S641), a change time value corresponding to the change pattern number is acquired, and saved in the special figure game process timer area (step S641). S642). In the present embodiment, there are 48 variation patterns in total.
Thereafter, a variation command corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step S643), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S644). As a result, the change command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the start of change of the decoration special figure related to the special figure 1 or the special figure is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control apparatus 300. Will be done.
After step S644, the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number) for the special figure 2, a decorative special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a special figure. A variation command including information regarding the variation pattern of the variation display game is listed, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step S381) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 70, in the special figure changing process, first, “3” is set as the process number (step S651), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “3” is saved). (Step S652). As a result, in the routine for the next special figure game process, “3” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the special figure display process (step S385).
Next, the display time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S653). Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S654). As a result, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is turned off. Further, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step S655). As a result, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is turned off.
Next, the stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step S656), and then the stop flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step S657). After step S657, the special figure changing process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step S382) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 71, in the special figure display processing, first, a command is loaded from the special decoration figure command area and prepared (step S661). Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step S662). As a result, a decoration special figure command is sent to the effect control apparatus 300, and the display of the decoration special figure related to the special figures 1 and 2 is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control apparatus 300. An effect display is performed.
Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step S663), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S664). As a result, a small hit fanfare command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an effect display related to the small hit fanfare is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300.

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hitting operation is opened twice (step S665). This is because the small hits may be opened once or twice, but when such a small hit occurs, whether or not the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 perform an operation of opening continuously twice. Is determined.
If the small hit operation is not opened twice (step S665; NO), the start value of one open is saved in the middle process control pointer area per special figure (step S666) and the middle process control pointer upper limit value per special figure The upper limit of opening once in the area is saved (step S667). In this case, “0” is set as the start value for the one-time opening, and “0” is set as the upper limit value. Thereby, the operation | movement which open | releases movable member 43a, 43b in the variable prize-winning apparatus 35 once is performed. After step S667, the process proceeds to step S670.
On the other hand, if the small hit operation is opened twice (step S665; YES), the start value of the double opening is saved in the middle process control pointer area per special figure (step S668), and the middle process control pointer per special figure is also saved. The upper limit value opened twice is saved in the upper limit value area (step S669). In this case, “0” is set as the start value for double opening, and “2” is set as the upper limit value. Thereby, the operation | movement which opens the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable prize-winning apparatus 35 twice continuously is performed. After step S669, the process proceeds to step S670.

In step S670, it is determined whether or not a small hit based on the fluctuation of FIG. This is to determine whether or not a small hit has occurred in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (left start opening, right start opening) 33a, 33b. The determination can be made based on whether the fluctuation flag or the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is saved. If a small hit occurs due to the fluctuation of Fig. 1 (step S679; YES), a signal related to the start of the special Fig. 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S671), and then the process proceeds to step S673. .
Special Figure 1 Signals related to the start of small hits include the following, all of which are on.
・ Special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on ・ Special electric accessory 1 in operation signal is turned on ・ Conditioning device operation area 1 effective signal is turned on ・ Continuous equipment operating device operation area 1 effective signal is on On the other hand, fluctuation of special figure 1 If no small hit has occurred (step S670; NO), a signal relating to the start of special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S672), and then the process proceeds to step S673.
Special Figure 2 Signals related to the start of small hits include the following, all of which are on.
・ Turn on special symbol 2 small hit signal ・ Turn on special electric accessory 1 active signal ・ Turn on condition device activation area 1 valid signal ・ Turn on continuous action equipment activation area 1 valid signal

In step S673, a small hit opening operation start command is prepared, and subsequently, an effect command setting process is performed (step S676). Thereby, a small hit release operation start command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an effect display related to the start of the small hit release operation is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, the value of the small hitting operation is saved in the accessory solenoid control pointer area (step S676), and the accessory solenoid control timer area is cleared to “0” (step S676). As a result, a small hitting operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), that is, a reciprocating motion of rotating so that the rear end side of the floor portion 61 is driven up and down is executed.
Next, the value of operation 1 for M1 small hits is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S677), and the M1 control timer area is cleared to “0” (step S678). Thereby, the small hit operation | movement (refer Fig.32 (a), (b)) of V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is performed.

Next, “4” is set as the process number (step S679), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “4” is saved) (step S680). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “4” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the small hit release process (step S385).
Next, the small hit release time is saved in the special game process timer area (step S681). The small hit opening time is set to 400 ms, for example. Next, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S682). As a result, the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 202 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to open according to the small hit release time. .

Next, the specific area passing flag area is cleared (step S683), and the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step S684). Since the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open according to the small hitting opening time, it is expected that game balls will win the variable winning device 35 (large winning opening). In addition, the specific area passing flag corresponding to the output of the specific area switches 80a to 80d for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area is cleared in advance, and the number of winning prizes is also cleared. .
Next, an output timer initial value (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the accessory count signal control timer area (step S685), and a fraud monitoring period non-period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step S686). These set the period for outputting the number-of-functions signal as one of various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 152, and during the small hitting operation, it is not the big prize opening fraud monitoring period. A process for removing the fraud monitoring period is performed.
Next, the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step S687), and if the number of control of the big hit 2 is not 0, -1 is updated (step S688), and the special figure display processing is terminated. The jackpot 2 control count is for determining whether the special game state is generated again by executing the special figure variation display game within the specified number of times from the end of the previous special game state. The prescribed number of times here is 10 times, 11 is set as an initial value at the end of the special gaming state, and -1 is updated at every end of the small hit. Then, it is determined that the special game state has occurred again in the execution of the special figure variation display game within 10 times since the end of the previous special game state because the special game state occurs when the number of control of the big hit 2 is not 0. It is supposed to be.

[Processing when small hits are open]
Next, details of the small hit release process (step S383) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 72, in the small hit releasing process, first, a special control hitting special control pointer is loaded and prepared (step S691). Next, the value of the loaded control pointer per special figure is compared with the small hit operation end value, and it is determined whether or not the loaded special control pointer value per special figure is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (step S692). ). This compares the value of the loaded control pointer during the special figure with the upper limit value for ending the small hitting operation, and determines whether or not the value has become larger.
If the value of the loaded control pointer during the special chart is not equal to or smaller than the small hit operation end value (step S692; NO), a small hit operation transition setting process is performed (step S693). Thus, at the time of a small win, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to be released for a certain period of time, and a game in which a game ball wins a prize at the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) is performed. Note that the opening control of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 includes opening once and opening twice, and details of the operation will be described later.

Next, the control pointer for special figure is updated by “+1” (step S694), a command for small hitting operation corresponding to the special control pointer for special figure is prepared (step S695), and then an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S696). Thereby, the command during the small hitting operation is sent to the effect control device 300, and the display corresponding to the fact that the small hitting operation is being performed is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. . After step S696, the small hit opening process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer during the loaded special figure is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step S692; YES), the process branches to step S697, and the processing number is set to “5” (step S697). The process number is saved in the figure game process number area (here, “5” is saved) (step S698). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “5” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the small hit remaining sphere process (step S387).
Next, a command for closing the big hit prize winning opening is prepared (step S699), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S700). As a result, a command for closing the small winning big prize opening is sent to the effect control apparatus 300, and the display corresponding to the closing of the big winning prize opening at the small hit is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control apparatus 300. It will be. After step S700, the small hit opening process is terminated.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step S693) in the small hit releasing process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 73 (a), in the small hit operation transition setting process, first, branch determination is performed using the middle control pointer per special figure (step S711). In this branch determination, the branch destination differs depending on whether the middle control pointer per special figure is “0” or “1”.
That is, if the control pointer during special figure is “0”, the process branches to step S712, and the wait time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S712). The wait time is an interval period between the first opening and the second opening when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened twice at the time of a small hit. Set to 1000 ms. Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S713). As a result, the first grand prize winning solenoid 201 and the second big prize winning solenoid 202 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to be closed. After step S713, the small hit motion transition setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the control pointer during special figure is “1”, the process branches to step S714 to save the small hit release time in the special figure game processing timer area (step S715). The small hit release time is a period during which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened at the time of the small hit, and the small hit release time is set to 400 ms, for example. Next, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S715). As a result, the first grand prize winning solenoid 201 and the second big prize winning solenoid 202 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to be opened.
Next, an output timer initial value (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the accessory count signal control timer area (step S716). This is to set a period for outputting the number-of-functions signal as one of various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 152, and during the small hitting operation, it is not a big prize opening fraud monitoring period A process for removing the fraud monitoring period is performed. After step S716, the small hit motion transition setting process is terminated.

[Timing chart of small hit operation]
Next, a specific example of the small hit operation will be described with reference to a timing chart of the small hit operation shown in FIG.
In FIG. 73 (b), in the small hitting operation, there are a case where the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once and a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice. The upper part of FIG. 73B is a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once, and the lower part of FIG. 73B is a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice.
First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 73 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 400 ms has elapsed), a predetermined opening operation is performed once, such as a closing operation again. Therefore, in the case of releasing once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 400 ms, and the small amount of the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within this period. A hit operation is performed. In addition, the information display 45 for displaying the effect state is provided with a display time (in this case, 368 ms) for notifying that there is an opening operation once in advance.

When the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then closed, the control pointer per special figure becomes zero. The small hit remaining sphere time starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then closed, and the small hit remaining sphere time becomes a period of “1900 ms + α”. The period “α” continues until the game ball is completely removed from the variable winning device 35. For example, if there is a remaining ball in the variable winning device 35, the remaining ball is removed from the variable winning device 35. It will continue until it is cut. Therefore, the period “α” is not a fixed period, but is a variable period that continues until the game ball is completely removed from the variable winning device 35.
Next, when “1900 ms + α” as a small hit remaining sphere time elapses, an operation is performed such that the small hit ending time exists for a predetermined time (here, 100 ms) from the elapsed timing. The small hit ending time is, for example, a period during which an effect display for notifying the information display 45 of the small hit ending is performed.
Observing with the player's line of sight, the small hit remaining ball time “1900ms + α” starts from the timing when the movable members 43a, 43b are opened once and then closed, and then the small hitting ending time (100ms) continues without a break. The ending period is a continuous period obtained by adding the small hitting remaining sphere time “1900 ms + α” and the small hitting ending time (100 ms), that is, 2000 ms.

  Next, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 73 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened twice, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 400 ms has elapsed), a predetermined mode of opening operation is performed twice, such as closing again. In this case, the first opening period of the movable members 43a and 43b is, for example, 400 ms. Subsequently, the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after the elapse of 400 ms, and then a predetermined wait time (1000 ms) is provided as an interval period. In this period, the movable members 43a and 43b continue to be closed, and at the same time as the predetermined wait time is finished, the second opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b is performed. The opening period of the second movable members 43a and 43b is also 400 m, for example. Therefore, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 400 ms, and the operation is performed twice with a predetermined wait time. Then, a small hitting operation is performed in such a manner that the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within the period in which the opening operation is performed twice. In addition, the information display 45 that displays the effect state is provided with a display time (in this case, 368 ms) for notifying that there is an opening operation twice.

In the case of the two-time opening operation as described above, the control pointer = 0 per special figure when the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after the first opening. Then, a predetermined wait time (1000 ms) is reached from the timing at which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after being opened once, and the second opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b is started simultaneously with the end of the predetermined wait time. . At this time, when the movable members 43a and 43b start to be opened for the second time, the control pointer per special figure becomes 1.
Thereafter, the small hit remaining ball time starts from the timing when the second opening period of the movable members 43a and 43b elapses and closes, and the small hit remaining ball time becomes a period of “1900 ms + α”. The period of “α” is continued until the game ball is completely removed from the variable winning device 35, and this has the same property as that in the case of the one-time opening operation described above.
Next, when “1900 ms + α” as a small hit remaining sphere time elapses, an operation is performed such that the small hit ending time exists for a predetermined time (here, 100 ms) from the elapsed timing. The small hit ending time is, for example, a period during which an effect display for notifying the information display 45 of the small hit ending is performed.
Similarly, in the case of the twice-opening operation, when observed with the player's line of sight, the small hit remaining ball time “1900 ms + α” starts from the timing at which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed once and then closed, and thereafter, the small time without a break. Since the hitting ending time (100 ms) continues, the apparent ending period is a continuous period obtained by adding the small hitting remaining sphere time “1900 ms + α” and the small hitting ending time (100 ms), that is, 2000 ms.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball process (step S384) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 74, in the small hit remaining sphere process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere counter is “0” (step S721), and the remaining sphere counter is not “0” (step S721; NO), the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S721; YES), it is determined that there is no remaining ball in the variable winning device 35, and the value of the stop operation is saved in the accessory solenoid control pointer area ( Step S722). Next, “0” is cleared in the accessory solenoid control timer area (step S723). As a result, when there is no remaining ball in the variable winning device 35, the operation of the accessory solenoid such as the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is stopped and the control of the accessory solenoid such as the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 is ended. It will be.

Next, the value of the control pointer for returning from the current position of the V accessory (V movable member 77) to the center position (initial position) in the shortest time is set (step S724). For example, as shown in FIG. 98, when the current position of the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the initial position, a value for moving the V movable member 77 to the left is set as the value of the control pointer. As indicated by 99, when the current position of the V movable member 77 is on the left side of the initial position, a value for moving the V movable member 77 to the right is set as the value of the control pointer. When the current position of the V movable member 77 is at the initial position, a value for stopping the movement of the V movable member 77 is set as the value of the control pointer.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value set in step S724 is the same as the value currently being controlled (step S725). That is, if the current moving direction of the V-movable member 77 is the right direction and a value for moving the V-movable member 77 to the right is set in step S724, it is determined in step S725 that they are the same. . If the current moving direction of the V-movable member 77 is the left direction and a value for moving the V-movable member 77 to the left is set in step S724, it is determined in step S725 that they are the same. .

When the value set in step S724 is the same as the currently controlled value (step S725; YES), the process proceeds to step S728.
On the other hand, if the value set in step S724 is not the same as the currently controlled value (step S725; NO), the value set in step S724 is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S726), and M1 The control timer area is cleared to 0 (step S727), and the process proceeds to step S728.

In step S728, a small hitting ending command is prepared (step S728), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S729). As a result, a small hit ending command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an effect display corresponding to the small hit ending is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, “6” is set as the process number (step S730), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “6” is saved) (step S731). As a result, in the routine for the next special figure game process, “6” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the small hit end process (step S385).
Next, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S732), and the big prize count area is cleared (step S733). At the end of the small hitting operation, the small hitting ending time is set to produce the ending, and the game ball winning count to the big winning opening (variable winning device 35) is cleared, and the next time It prepares for the hit operation (including both big hits and small hits). Next, a signal related to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step S734).
Signals relating to the end of the small hitting operation include the following signals, all of which are off.
・ Special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off ・ Special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned off ・ Condition device operation area 1 valid signal is turned off ・ Substantial action device working area 1 valid signal is turned off After step S734, small hit remains End the ball process.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step S385) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 75, in the small hit end process, first, based on the value of the M1 control pointer area, it is determined whether or not the V combination (V movable member 77) is in the center position (initial position). (Step S741) When the V accessory (V movable member 77) is not at the center position (initial position) (Step S741; NO), the small hit end processing is ended. On the other hand, when the V combination (V movable member 77) is at the center position (initial position) (step S741; YES), the value of the M1 stop operation is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S742), and M1 control is performed. The timer area is cleared to 0 (step S743).
Next, it is determined whether or not a specific area has passed (step S744). This is because specific area switches 80a to 80d that detect game balls that have passed through the specific area are arranged inside the variable winning device 35, and the specific area switches 80a to 80d detect that the game balls have passed through the specific area. Then, since it is the structure that a big hit (special game state) occurs as a V prize, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area switches 80a to 80d.
If there is no game ball passing through the specific area (step S744; NO), the process branches to step S755, “1” is set as the process number (step S755), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (here, "1" is saved) (step S756). Thereby, in the routine for the next special figure game process, “1” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the special figure routine process (step S380).
Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S757), and the small hit end processing is ended.
The signals relating to the end of the small hit are as follows, and all of them are in an off state.
・ Special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off ・ Special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned off On the other hand, if there is a game ball passing through a specific area (step S744; YES), a command is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area ( Together with step S745), an effect command setting process is performed (step S746). As a result, a decoration special figure command is sent to the effect control apparatus 300, and the decoration special figure command (for example, a decoration special figure command for producing a big hit) is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control apparatus 300. A corresponding effect display will be performed.

Next, a big hit fanfare command is prepared (step S747), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S748). As a result, a big hit fanfare command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an effect display corresponding to the big hit fanfare command is performed on the information display unit 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect display for notifying the big hit with the fanfare). Will be done.
Next, “7” is set as the processing number (step S749), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (here, “7” is saved) (step S750). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “7” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the fanfare / interval process (step S386).

Next, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the specific area passing flag and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S751), and the specific area passing flag area is cleared (step S752).
Specifically, the specific area passing flag is a flag indicating that the passing of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 3 (third specific area switch 80c) or the specific area switch 4 (fourth specific area switch 80d). In this case, “10 seconds” is set as the big hit fanfare time.
The specific area passing flag is a flag indicating that the passing of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) or the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b), and is stopped. When the symbol pattern is “stop symbol pattern 1”, “10 seconds” is set as the big hit fanfare time. On the other hand, the specific area passing flag is a flag indicating that the passing of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 1 (first specific area switch 80a) or the specific area switch 2 (second specific area switch 80b), and is stopped. When the symbol pattern is “stop symbol pattern 2” or “stop symbol pattern 3”, “20 seconds” is set as the big hit fanfare time in order to perform a round lottery effect.

Next, a signal related to the end of the small hit (special symbol 1 small hit signal is OFF, special symbol 2 small hit signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S753).
Next, in order to count the number of rounds of the big hit, an initial value (for example, “1”) is saved in the round number area (step S754), and the small hit end processing ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step S386) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 76, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step S761), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step S762). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step S763). As a result, a round command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an effect display corresponding to the round command (for example, an effect display for notifying the number of rounds in the special game state) is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. ) Will be performed.
Next, the special winning opening opening time value corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step S764). Here, the first on-time during the round is set as the winning opening opening time value, and specifically, for example, 800 ms or 20000 ms is set as described later with reference to FIG. Next, the special winning opening release time value is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S765), and the special winning opening release information and the start value and upper limit value of the control pointer corresponding to the number of rounds are saved (step S766).
A specific example of the special winning opening and the control pointer will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the start value is saved in the middle control pointer area per special figure (step S767), and the upper limit value is saved in the middle control pointer upper limit area per special figure (step S768).
Next, “8” is set as the process number (step S769), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “8” is saved) (step S770). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “8” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the special winning opening opening process (step S387).

Next, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S771). As a result, the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 202 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to open according to the big hit release time.
Next, the winning prize count number area is cleared to clear the game ball winning count number to the winning prize opening (variable winning device 35) (step S772), and the fraud monitoring period is displayed in the winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area. The outside flag is saved (step S773). This is a process for removing the fraud monitoring period because it is not the big prize opening fraud monitoring period during the big hit operation. Next, a signal related to the start of opening of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S774).
Signals related to the opening of the big prize opening are as follows.
-Turn on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 Next, it is determined whether or not the second round (substantially the first round since the first round is excluded) is determined (step S775). If it has not been started (step S775; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is the start of the second round (step S775; YES), the value of the big hit operation is saved in the accessory solenoid control pointer area (step S776). Thereby, a big hit operation of the floor accessory (floor portion 61), that is, a reciprocating motion that rotates so that the rear end side of the floor accessory (floor portion 61) moves up and down is executed.
Next, the accessory solenoid control timer area is cleared to 0 (step S777).
Next, the value of the M1 big hit operation is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S778). Thereby, the big hit operation | movement (refer FIG. 33 (a), (b)) of V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is performed.
Next, the M1 control timer area is cleared to 0 (step S779), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step S387) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 77, in the special winning opening opening process, first, a special control per special chart is loaded and prepared (step S781). Next, the value of the loaded control pointer per special figure is compared with the big hit operation end value, and it is determined whether or not the value of the loaded special pointer per special figure is greater than or equal to the big hit operation end value (step S782). This compares the value of the loaded control pointer during the special chart with the upper limit value for ending the big hit operation, and determines whether or not the value has become larger.
If the value of the loaded special pointer per special figure is not equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (step S782; NO), the special control per special figure is updated by "+1" (step S783), and the big hit operation transition setting process is performed. (Step S784). Since the value of the control pointer during special figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value for ending the big hit operation, various kinds of big hit operations are performed according to the value of the control pointer during special figure. After step S784, the special winning opening open process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the loaded control pointer during the special figure is greater than or equal to the big hit operation end value (step S782; YES), the process branches to step S785 to determine whether or not the final round is the big hit. If it is not the big round last round (step S785; NO), the remaining ball processing time for other than the final round (for example, 900 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S786). Next, an interval command is prepared (step S787), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S788). Thereby, the interval command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the interval command is performed on the information display unit 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, the effect display for notifying the interval between rounds). ) Will be performed.
After step S788, the process proceeds to step S792.

On the other hand, if the final round is a big hit in step S785 (step S785; YES), the process branches to step S790. Then, the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 ms) for the final round is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S789). Next, a jackpot ending command is prepared (step S790), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S791). Thereby, the jackpot ending command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the jackpot ending command is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, the effect of notifying the jackpot ending) Display) will be performed.
After step S791, the process proceeds to step S792.
When the process proceeds from step S788 or step S791 to step S792, “9” is set as the process number (step S792), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “9” is saved) (step S793). ). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “9” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the winning prize remaining ball process (step S388).
Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S794). As a result, the first grand prize winning solenoid 201 and the second big prize winning solenoid 202 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to stop. After step S794, the special winning opening opening process is terminated.

[Big hit action transition setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot movement transition setting process (step S784) in the above-described special winning opening open process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 78 (a), in the big hit operation transition setting process, first, branch determination is performed using the middle control pointer per special figure (step S801). In this branch determination, the branch destination differs depending on whether the middle control pointer is “even” or “odd” per special figure.
That is, if the control pointer during the special figure is “even”, the process branches to step S802, and the wait time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S802). The wait time is an interval period between the current release when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened at the time of a big hit and the next release. The wait time is set to 800 ms, for example. (See the upper part of FIG. 78 (b)).
Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S803). As a result, the first grand prize winning solenoid 201 and the second big prize winning solenoid 202 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to be closed. After step S803, the big hit operation transition setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special pointer per special figure is “odd”, the process branches to step S804, and the big hit release time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S804). In step S804, the opening time (for example, 800 ms) in the “opening / closing” mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 78B is set as the big hit opening time.
Next, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S805). As a result, the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 202 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to open based on the big hit release time set in step S805. It will be. After step S805, the big hit operation transition setting process is terminated.

[Timing chart of jackpot operation]
Next, a specific example of the jackpot operation will be described with reference to a timing chart of the jackpot operation shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 78 (b), the jackpot operation has the following modes.
“Opening and Closing” Mode This is a gaming mode that is performed in all rounds when the passing of a game ball is detected by the first specific area switch 80a, the second specific area switch 80b, and the third specific area 80c.
“Long Open” Mode This is a game mode that is performed in all rounds when the passing of a game ball is detected by the fourth specific area switch 80d.

In the “open / close” mode, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 78 (b), when the movable members 43 a, 43 b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once as a single round of operation, the movable members 43 a, 43b is opened (converted to the second state), and a predetermined mode of opening operation is performed once after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 800 ms has elapsed).
Therefore, in the case of releasing once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are in an open state for 800 ms, and a big hit operation is performed in which a game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within this period. Is called. A closing period (800 ms) in which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed until the next opening game is provided.
Then, the opening / closing control of the movable members 43a and 43b as described above is repeatedly performed 18 times in one whole round, and this 18 times opening / closing control is configured as one round. That is, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are in the form of (800 ms on + 800 ms off) × 18 times = 1 round game.

In the case of 16R big hit, the first game that generates a big hit does not correspond to a game with a big hit round, so the round with a big hit is substantially 15R.
In a big hit with full opening, the above-mentioned one round game is executed. When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed in the final round of each round, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 78 (b), the big hit remaining ball time starts from the closing timing, and the big hit remaining ball The time is a period of “900 ms”.
In this case, the remaining ball time (900 ms) is short, and even if there is a remaining ball inside the variable winning device 35, the next round game is started. This is because there is a high possibility that the remaining ball will escape from the variable winning device 35 during execution of the next round game.
Next, the period until the transition to the next round game is an interval period (for example, 100 ms).
Thus, in the big hit of the “opening / closing” mode, the above-mentioned one round game is 15 rounds (in the case of “16R big hit”), 7 rounds (in the case of “per 8R”), or 4 rounds (“per 5R”). When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed in the final round of the final round game, as shown in the upper part of FIG. The remaining sphere time starts, and only in this case, the jackpot remaining sphere time becomes a period of “1900 ms” and is set to a longer time. This is because it takes a little longer time for the remaining balls in the final round of the 15-round game to escape from the variable winning device 35. When the remaining ball time (“1900 ms” elapses), the process shifts to a big hit end operation.

In the “long opening / closing” mode, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 78 (b), when the movable members 43 a and 43 b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once as a single round of operation, the movable member 43 a , 43b perform an opening operation (converted to the second state), and the opening operation in a predetermined manner is performed once after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, after 20000 ms has elapsed).
Therefore, in the case of releasing once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 20000 ms, and a big hit operation is performed in which a game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within this period. Is called.
Then, as described above, after the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 have been opened and closed once, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 78 (b), the big hit remaining ball time from the closing timing. And the jackpot remaining sphere time is “900 ms”.
In this case, the remaining ball time (900 ms) is short, and even if there is a remaining ball inside the variable winning device 35, the next round game is started. This is because there is a high possibility that the remaining ball will escape from the variable winning device 35 during execution of the next round game.

Next, the period until the transition to the next round game is an interval period (for example, 100 ms).
In this way, in the big hit of the “long mode”, one round game as described above is repeatedly executed, and when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed in the final round of the last round game, FIG. As shown in the lower part of (b), the jackpot remaining sphere time starts from the closing timing. Only in this case, the jackpot remaining sphere time becomes a period of “1900 ms”, and is set to a longer time. This is because it takes a little longer time for the remaining ball in the final round of the last round game to escape from the variable winning device 35. When the remaining ball time (“1900 ms” elapses), the process shifts to a big hit end operation.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step S388) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 79, in the winning prize remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is the final round of the jackpot game (for example, 16 rounds if 16R jackpot) (step S811). If it is not the final round of the game (step S811; NO), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step S812). Next, the winning time opening information and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step S813). The contents of the next round game are determined by the settings of steps S811 and S812.

Next, “7” is set as the process number (step S815), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “7” is saved) (step S816). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “7” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the fanfare / interval process (step S386).
Next, a signal related to the completion of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817).
Signals related to the start at the end of the big prize opening are as follows and are in an off state.
-Turn off signal during operation of special electric accessory 1 After step S817, the winning ball remaining ball processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round of the big hit game (step S811; YES), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S818). If the remaining ball counter is not “0” (step S818; NO), since there is still a remaining ball in the variable winning device 35, the process does not proceed to the big hit end process (step S392), and the big winning port remaining ball The process ends. Then, the routine is repeated, and when the remaining ball counter becomes “0” (step S818; YES), since there is no remaining ball, “10” is set as the process number (step S819), and the special figure game process The process number is saved in the number area (here, “10” is saved) (step S820). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “10” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the big hit end process (step S389).

Next, the big hit ending time (for example, 6100 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S821), and a signal relating to the end of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S822).
Signals related to the completion of the big prize opening are as follows.
-Turn off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 Next, the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step S823). At the end of the jackpot operation, the jackpot ending time is set to produce the ending, and the winning count of the game ball to the big prize opening (variable winning device 35) is cleared, It prepares for the operation (including both big hits and small hits). Next, the round number area is cleared (step S824). Next, the special winning opening opening information area is cleared (step S825), and a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step S826). This is a process for returning to the fraud monitoring period because the big hit operation ends and the winning prize fraud monitoring period starts again.
Next, the value of the stop operation is saved in the accessory solenoid control pointer area (step S827), and the accessory solenoid control timer area is cleared to 0 (step S828).
Next, the value of the M1 big hit end operation is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S829), the M1 control timer area is cleared to 0 (step S830), and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, details of the jackpot ending process (step S389) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 80, in the jackpot end process, first, “1” is set as the process number (step S831), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “1” is saved) ( Step S832). As a result, in the routine for the next special figure game process, “1” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the special figure routine process (step S380). In order to turn off, the normal number is saved in the game state display number 1 area (step S833) and the normal number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step S835).
Next, a signal related to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step S835). As a result, information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as a signal related to the end of the big hit is output to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal.
The signals relating to the end of the big hit include the following, all of which are off.
-Turn off 1 signal of big hit-Turn off 2 signals of big hit Next, a signal related to the end of big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S835).
The signals relating to the end of the big hit include the following, all of which are off.
・ Turn off the condition device operating signal

Next, the initial value is saved in the area for the number of times of control of 2 times (step S837). In order to subtract the jackpot 2 control count before the determination in the special figure display processing, a value obtained by adding 1 to the specified count (here, 10 times), that is, “11” is saved as an initial value.
Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round display LED pointer area (step S838), and the jackpot ending process is terminated.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, the effect command setting process in each process will be described with reference to FIG. The effect command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step S841), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S842). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S842; YES), the process returns to step S841 to repeat the loop. This waits until the production serial transmission buffer is not full.
On the other hand, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step S842; NO), the process proceeds to step S843 and command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step S843).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step S844), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S845). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S845; YES), the process returns to step S844 to repeat the loop. This waits until the production serial transmission buffer is not full.
On the other hand, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step S845; NO), the process proceeds to step S846 to write command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the effect serial transmission buffer. After step S846, the effect command setting process is terminated.
Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. Note that the command may be transmitted to the payout control apparatus 200 by serial communication.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (steps S391 and S393) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 82, in the symbol variation control process, first, in step S851, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag (read from (A) below) of the target symbol is varying.
Here, the information defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in advance is as follows.
(B) Address of fluctuation control flag area (b) Address of symbol display table (for fluctuation) (c) Address of symbol display table (for stop) The information defined on the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is Is as follows.
(D) Address of variable symbol number area (e) Display data (there are the number of variable symbol numbers)
(F) Address of segment area Furthermore, the information defined on the symbol display table (for stopping) is as follows.
(G) Stop symbol number area address (h) Display data (the number of stop symbol numbers)
(Re) Segment area address

The check result of step S851 is determined in step S852, and if it is changing (YES), the process proceeds to step S853, and the symbol display table (for variation) (above (b)) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired. . Next, in step S854, the target blinking fluctuation timer is updated by “−1”, and it is checked whether the time is up (flashing fluctuation timer = 0). The check result in step S854 is determined in step S855. If the time has not expired (NO), the process jumps to step S858 to display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area (the above (e), ( Get h)).
Next, the process proceeds to step S859, where the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (above (F), (L)), and the routine is terminated.
Therefore, at this time, since the variation timer of the target symbol does not time out, the display data of the symbol corresponding to the symbol number for variation is saved in the target segment area, and the routine is repeated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S855 that the target flashing variation timer has timed up (YES), the process proceeds to step S856, and the initial value of the flashing control timer (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the target flashing control timer area. Next, after updating the target variation symbol number (above (d)) by “+1” in step S857, the process proceeds to step S858, and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area (above (e), (Chi)). Next, the process proceeds to step S859, where the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (above (F), (L)), and the routine is terminated.
Therefore, at this time, the flashing control timer initial value is saved by the time-up of the target flashing variation timer, the target variation symbol number is updated, and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is displayed. It will be saved in the target segment area.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation control flag of the target symbol is not changing but is stopped in step S852 (NO), the process branches to step S860, and the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol (above) Next, in step S861, display data corresponding to the value of the target stop symbol number area is acquired, and then the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step S859). Exit.
Therefore, at this time, since the fluctuation control flag of the target symbol is stopped from being changed, the symbol display data for stoppage is saved in the target segment area.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte sorting process (step S635) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
The sorting process is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the special-figure variation display game from a selection table such as the special-figure 1 variation pattern selection table or the special-figure 2 variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number.
FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution process when the size of the random number used for distribution is 2 bytes. The 2-byte data is, for example, “0” to “49999”.
When this routine is started, it is first checked in step S881 whether or not the top data in the target selection table is an unallocated code.
Here, the selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern group. For example, if there is no need for distribution, a code without distribution is defined at the top.
If it is determined that the top data in the selection table is a code without sorting (step S882; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step S887), and the 2-byte sorting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S882 that the top data in the selection table is not a code without distribution (step S882; NO), one distribution value first defined in the selection table is acquired (step S883). .
Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step S883 from the random number value checked in step S881 (for example, the value of the variation pattern random number) (step S884), and then calculated. It is then determined whether or not the new random value is smaller than “0” (step S885).

If it is determined that the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step S885; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step S886), the process returns to step S883 to repeat the loop. .
That is, in step S883, after the distribution value specified next in the selection table is acquired, the new random value is subtracted by subtracting the distribution value from the new random value determined in step S884 as the random value. Calculate (step S884). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step S885).
The above processing is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step S885 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step S885; YES). As a result, any one variation pattern group is selected from at least one variation pattern group defined in the selection table.
If it is determined in step S885 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step S885; YES), the process proceeds to step S887, and the data address corresponding to the distribution result is updated. (Step S887) The 2-byte sorting process ends.

Thus, for example, the fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine whether or not the reach state is generated in the special figure fluctuation display game, and to determine the reach fluctuation mode in the special figure fluctuation display game when the reach state occurs. Therefore, the above selection table corresponds to a variation group selection table such as a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table or a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table.
The selection table such as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table is used in the special figure fluctuation display game when the reach state occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game or when the reach state occurs. Depending on the type of reach (reach fluctuation mode), a plurality of types of latter half fluctuation pattern groups are defined, and the ROM 171B storing the fluctuation group selection table stores the first special figure and the second special figure in the special figure fluctuation display game. As the variation mode of the figure (identification information), a plurality of variation distribution information (variation pattern group) and respective distribution values according to each setting of a reachless variation mode in which no reach state occurs and a plurality of types of reach variation modes are predetermined Are stored in association with each other in this order.
Therefore, by executing this distribution process, if the top data of the selection table is not a code without distribution, a new value is generated based on the distribution value stored in the selection table and the random value related to the determination. By quickly calculating a random value and repeating the process of determining whether the new random value is less than the predetermined value “0”, any one of the plurality of variation pattern groups is quickly set. To be able to.

[Accessory solenoid control processing]
Next, details of the accessory solenoid control process (step S394) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 84, in the accessory solenoid control process, it is first determined whether or not the accessory solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (step S891). If the accessory solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (step S891; YES), the accessory solenoid control process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the accessory solenoid control pointer is not a no-update code (step S891; NO), the accessory solenoid control timer is updated by “−1” (step S892), and the accessory renoid control timer is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S893). If the accessory solenoid control timer is not “0” (step S893; NO), the accessory solenoid control process is terminated and the routine is repeated.
If the accessory solenoid control timer is “0” (step S893; YES), an accessory solenoid control table is set (step S894), and a table address corresponding to the accessory solenoid control pointer is calculated (step S895).

Subsequently, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the accessory solenoid control pointer area (step S896). Next, the control timer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the accessory solenoid control timer area (step S897). Next, the output data of the next operation is acquired and saved in the accessory solenoid output data area (step S898).
Then, after step S898, the accessory solenoid control process is terminated.
As described above, in the accessory solenoid control process, the floor accessory solenoid 61b1 for rotating the floor accessory (floor portion 61) in the accessory device 51 up and down is controlled, and a game such as lamp notification is performed. A process for producing information that is advantageous to the user (information that teaches timing when the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball) is performed.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the segment LED editing process (step S73) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the following description of the flowcharts, “step A” is used as the step number.
The segment LED editing process is a process related to the segment LED provided in the collective display device 50 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 35). As described above, the collective display device 50 is a so-called special figure (this special figure). A display, and also a display of a special figure (this special figure) start memory hold (sometimes referred to as a special figure hold display) and a display of a gaming state, for example, a plurality of indicators using LEDs as light sources (For example, a display device composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment display device capable of displaying numbers or the like as the special figure). For example, among the LED segments in the collective display device 50, those that display the special figure 1 are arranged as a special figure 1 display, and those that display the special figure 2 are arranged as a special figure 2 display.
These displays are configured by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a seven-segment indicator) that use LEDs as the light source, and settings relating to driving of such a segment LED. The segment LED editing process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the segment LED editing process, first, the gaming state display table 1 is set (step A1). The gaming state display table 1 is for displaying the current gaming state. Here, data necessary for displaying the first gaming state display units D7 and D8 for notifying the gaming state such as whether or not the big hit is set is set. Is done. Next, display data corresponding to the game state display number 1 is acquired and saved in the segment area (segment areas of the first game state display portions D7 and D8 in the collective display device 50) (step A2).
Next, the game state display table 2 is set (step A3). The gaming state display table 2 is for displaying the current gaming state. Here, the gaming state display table 2 displays the second gaming state display units D9, D10, and D13 to D18 for notifying the gaming state such as whether or not a continuous big hit is being made. Necessary data is set. The consecutive big hit is a case where a special game state is generated again by executing the special figure variation display game within a specified number of times (here, 10 times) from the end of the previous special game state.
Next, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area (the second game state display units D9, D10 and D13 to D18 in the collective display device 50) (step A4).

Next, a round display table is set (step A5). The round display table is for displaying the lottery result of the round lottery. For example, data necessary for display of the round display units D3 to D5 for notifying the number of rounds determined in the round lottery item (determination device 80) is displayed. Is set.
Next, display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (segment areas of the round display portions D3 to D5 in the collective display device 50) (step A6).
Next, the special figure 2 hold number display table is set (step A7). The special figure 2 number-of-holds display table is used to display the current special figure 2 on-hold status. Data necessary for display of D12 is set.
Next, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area (segment areas of the special figure 2 hold indicators D11 and D12 in the collective display device 50) (step A8). After step A8, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Motor control processing]
Next, the motor control process (step S74) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this embodiment, there are three accessory motors: a drum accessory motor 66 (first motor), a V movable accessory motor 71 (second motor), and a round lottery accessory motor 88 (third motor). Is arranged. The drum accessory motor 66 (first motor) drives the rotation of the drum accessory 62 in the drum accessory unit 60. Further, the V movable accessory motor 71 (second motor) drives the sliding movement of the V movable member 77 in the V movable accessory unit 70. Further, the round lottery accessory motor 88 (third motor) drives the rotation of the rotating bodies (the horizontal movable member 82 and the vertical movable member 85) in the determining device 80.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the motor control process, first, the address of the head area of the motor 1 control area is prepared (step A11), the motor 1 operation table is prepared (step A12), and the motor operation editing process is performed (step A12). Step A13). The motor operation editing process of step A13 is to perform a ball biting process of the accessory motor (first motor) using the motor 1 control table.
Thus, the address of the head area of the motor 1 control area is prepared, the driving of the accessory motor (first motor) is controlled using the motor 1 operation table, and the drum accessory 62 of the drum accessory unit 60 is controlled. The rotation will be driven.
Next, an address of the head area of the motor 2 control area is prepared (step A14), a motor 2 operation table is prepared (step A16), and motor operation editing processing is performed (step A17). The motor operation editing process in step A17 performs a ball biting process of the accessory motor (second motor) using the motor 2 control table.
In this way, the address of the head area of the motor 2 control area is prepared, and the driving of the accessory motor (second motor) is controlled using the motor 2 operation table, so that the V movable member 77 in the V movable accessory unit 70 is controlled. The slide movement is driven.

Next, an address of the head area of the motor 3 control area is prepared (step A17), a motor 3 operation table is prepared (step A18), and motor operation editing processing is performed (step A19). The motor operation editing process in step A19 is to perform a ball biting process of an accessory motor (third motor) using the motor 3 control table.
Thus, the address of the head area of the motor 3 control area is prepared, the driving of the accessory motor (third motor) is controlled using the motor 3 operation table, and the rotating body (horizontal movable member 82) in the determining device 80 is controlled. And the rotation of the vertical movable member 85) is driven. After step A19, the motor control process is terminated.

[Motor operation edit processing]
Next, the motor operation editing process (steps A13, A16, A19) in the motor control process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the motor operation editing process, first, it is determined whether or not the target control pointer is a no-update code (step A31). If the target control pointer is a no-update code (step A31; YES), the motor operation editing process is terminated.
“Target” in this process refers to the drum accessory motor 66 that is the object of control in the motor operation editing process if the motor operation editing process is the motor operation editing process in step A13. If the editing process is the motor operation editing process in step A16, it indicates the V movable accessory motor 71 to be controlled in the motor operation editing process, and if the motor operation editing process is the motor operation editing process in step A19. The round lottery accessory motor 88 that is the object of control in the motor operation editing process.

On the other hand, if the target control pointer is not a no-update code (step A31; NO), the process proceeds to step A32, where it is determined whether or not the target control timer is “0”. If the target control timer is “0” (step A32; YES), the process jumps to step A57.
If the target control pointer is not a no-update code (step A31; NO) and the target control timer is not “0” (step A32; NO), the process proceeds to step A33, and the target control timer is set to “−1”. "Update (Step A33). Next, it is determined whether or not the target control timer is “0” (step A34). If the target control timer is not “0” (step A34; NO), the process jumps to step A46.
On the other hand, if the target control timer is “0” (step A34; YES), the process proceeds to step A35.

In step A35, it is determined whether or not the target control information is time value control. This is to determine whether the target control information controls the time value when performing motor control. If the target control information is time value control (step A35; YES), the process jumps to step A57.
On the other hand, if the target control information is not time value control (step A35; NO), the process proceeds to step A36, and the target ball biting process count is updated by "+1". This is because the target control information does not control the time value (that is, control for monitoring the state of the motor switch), but the target information set to the time value required to detect the motor switch or more Since the game timer has been updated until the control timer reaches “0”, there is a possibility that the game ball has caused any kind of ball biting, and therefore the target ball biting process count is updated by “+1”.
This is to count the number of times when the ball is bitten inside the accessory device 51 or the determining device 80.
When a ball bit is caused, the ball bit is often eliminated by performing a process such as reverse rotation of the accessory motor.
Next, the target ball biting process count is compared with an error occurrence determination value (for example, three times) to determine whether the target ball biting process count is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value (step A37).
In the drawings (FIG. 87, etc.), there is a case where “ball biting” is indicated, but this means the same as “ball biting”, and both expressions may be used in the field of gaming machines. There are so.
If the target ball biting process count is not equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value (step A37; NO), the process jumps to step A43.

On the other hand, if the target ball biting process count is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value (step A37; YES), the target ball biting process count is set to an upper limit value (for example, upper limit value = error occurrence determination value (for example, as described above)). "3") (step A38), it is determined whether or not an error has already occurred in the ball bite (step A39) If no error has already occurred in the ball bite (step A39; NO), An accessory error occurrence flag is saved in the article error state flag area (step A40), and a target accessory error occurrence command is prepared (step A41), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A42). If the target ball biting process count is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value and the ball biting error has not yet occurred, the accessory error occurrence command is 300, and the display control unit 300 controls the information display unit 45 to display an effect corresponding to the accessory error occurrence command (for example, a display for notifying the occurrence of an object ball biting error). After step A42, the process proceeds to step A43.
If it progresses to step A43, it will be determined whether it is a big hit operation | movement (step A43), and if it is not a big hit operation | movement (step A43; NO), it will progress to step A57. If it is not a big hit, the ball biting process operation (see FIG. 34) is not performed, and the routine proceeds to step A57 in order to continue the normal operation according to the gaming state.
On the other hand, when the big hit operation is being performed (step A43; YES), the target ball biting flag is set (step A44), and the target ball biting next pointer is loaded as a control pointer (step A45). Then, the process proceeds to Step A621 (FIG. 88).
On the other hand, if the ball bite has already occurred in error (step A39; YES), the process jumps to step A43 without performing the processes of steps A40 to A42, and executes the processes after step A43.

In step A46, it is determined whether or not the target control information is time value control. This is to determine whether the target control information controls the value of time when performing motor control. If the target control information is time value control (step A46; YES), the process jumps to step A71.
On the other hand, if the target control information is not time value control (step A46; NO), the process proceeds to step A47 to set a motor control information table (step A47) and calculate a table address corresponding to the control information (step A47). A48). Next, the address, monitoring bit data, and determination data of the switch control area of the motor switch to be monitored are acquired (step A49).
Here, the motor switch to be monitored is the position of the drum function motor switch 66a for detecting the position of the drum function 62 (may be the initial position of the drum function motor 66, etc.) and the position of the V movable member 77. (It may be the initial position of the V movable accessory motor 73 or the like.) The V movable accessory motor switch 73a for detecting the position, the position of the horizontal movable member 82 (the position of the horizontal movable member 85 or the round lottery accessory motor 88). It may be an initial position or the like.) Among the motor switches such as the round lottery accessory motor switch 88a for detecting the initial position, the switch currently being monitored is indicated.

After step A49, the process proceeds to step A50, and the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data (step A49). Thereby, the state of the switch currently monitored is checked among motor switches such as the accessory motor switches 66a, 73a, and 88a.
Next, it is determined whether or not the next operation transition condition is satisfied (step A51). This is because the target control information is not time value control, a motor control information table is set, a table address corresponding to the control information is calculated, the address of the switch control area of the motor switch to be monitored, monitoring bit data, Since the determination data is acquired and the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data, it is determined whether the transition to the next operation is possible.

If the next operation transition condition is not satisfied (step A51; NO), the process jumps to step A71 (FIG. 88). On the other hand, if the next operation transition condition is satisfied (step A51; YES), the target ball biting process count is cleared to “0” (step A52). Next, it is determined whether or not the ball bite error has already been released (step A53). If the ball bite error has already been released (step A53; YES), the process jumps to step A57.
On the other hand, if the ball biting error has not already been released (step A53; NO), the process proceeds to step A54, where the accessory error release flag is saved in the subject accessory error state flag area (step A54), and An object error cancel command is prepared (step A55), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A56). As a result, the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data, and when the condition for transition to the next operation is satisfied, the target ball biting process count is cleared to “0”, The target accessory error cancel command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the accessory error cancel command is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, a ball biting error of an accessory). Display for notifying the release of). After step A56, the process proceeds to step A57.

When the process proceeds to step A57, the target control pointer is loaded (step A57), and it is determined whether or not the loaded control pointer is to perform the ball biting return operation (step A58). If the control pointer performs a ball bite return operation (step A58; YES), the target ball bite processing flag is cleared (step A59) and the target ball bite return pointer is loaded as a control pointer (step A59). A60). After step A60, the process proceeds to step A61.
On the other hand, if the control pointer does not perform the ball biting return operation (step A58; NO), the process jumps to step A61.
When the process proceeds to step A61, the address of the motor operation table corresponding to the control pointer is calculated (step A61), the control pointer is acquired and saved in the target control pointer area (step A62), and the control timer is acquired. Then, it is saved in the target control timer area (step A63).

Next, control information is acquired and saved in the target control information area (step A64), and excitation information is acquired and saved in the target excitation information area (step A65) to clear the target excitation timer area. (Step A66).
Here, the excitation information is information for exciting the target motor (motor switches such as the accessory motor switches 66a, 73a, and 88a), that is, turning on (rotating) the motor.
Next, it is determined whether or not the control information is time value control (step A67). This is to determine whether the target control information controls the time value when performing motor control. If the target control information is time value control (step A67; YES), the process jumps to step A70. In step A70, the no-update code is saved in the next pointer area when the target ball is biting (step A70), and then the process proceeds to step A71.
On the other hand, if the control information is not the time value control (step A67; NO), the process proceeds to step A68, where the next ball biting pointer is obtained and saved in the target ball biting next pointer area (step A68). Next, the control pointer before update is saved in the target ball biting return pointer area (step A69), and then the process proceeds to step A71.
Here, the process from step A61 to step A69 sets the value of the return point when returning from the ball biting process.

When the process proceeds from step A69 or step A70 to step A71, it is determined whether or not the target excitation timer is “0” (step A71). If the target excitation timer is not “0” (step A71; NO), the target excitation timer is updated by “−1” (step A72), and it is determined whether or not the target excitation timer has become “0”. (Step A73). If the target excitation timer is not “0” (step A73; N0), the motor operation editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the target excitation timer is “0” (step A71; YES) or when the target excitation timer is “0” (step A73; YES), the process jumps to step A74.
If the target excitation timer is determined to be “0” in step A71, or if the target excitation timer is determined to be “0” in step A73, the target excitation timer is “0” in all cases, and therefore step A74. Then, it is determined whether the target excitation information is stop information (step A74). If the target excitation information is stop information (step A74; YES), the output off data is saved in the target excitation data area (step A75), and then the motor operation editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the target excitation information is not stop information (step A74; NO), the process proceeds to step A76, a motor excitation information table is set (step A76), and the address of the table corresponding to the target excitation information is calculated. (Step A77), an excitation timer is acquired and saved in the target excitation timer area (Step A78).
Next, an excitation counter addition value is acquired and added to the target excitation counter (step A79). Next, the value after addition is corrected to a range of “0” to “3” (step A80).
Here, when the target motor (motor switch such as the accessory motor switches 66a, 73a, 88a) rotates clockwise (CW rotation), “+1” and “+2” are added values, and the motor rotates counterclockwise. In the case of rotation (CCW rotation), “−1” and “−2” are added values.
This is because when the ball is bitten, the accessory motor is reversely rotated or forward rotated to cancel the ball bite.
After step A80, the process proceeds to step A81 where the corrected value is saved in the target excitation counter area (step A81) and the motor excitation data table is set (step A82). Next, the address of the table corresponding to the target excitation counter is calculated (step A83), then the output data is acquired and saved in the target excitation data area (step A84). After step A84, the motor operation editing process is terminated.

[Abnormal emission monitoring processing]
Next, the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S75) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 89, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step A111). This is because the game control device 100 has an input signal from the left big prize opening switch 103 that has detected the winning to the variable prize winning device 35 (that is, the left big prize opening switch 103 wins the variable prize winning device 35). Is detected).
Here, in order to detect a game ball flowing into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35, a left large winning port switch 103 and a right large winning port switch 104 are provided, and from the variable winning device 35 to the outside. In order to detect the game balls to be discharged, remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113 are provided.
In this case, the monitoring function of the remaining balls is to monitor whether or not the game balls won in the variable winning device 35 are pulled out and remain in the variable winning device 35.
In the present embodiment, the above mechanism is utilized as a function for monitoring abnormal discharge separately from the function for monitoring remaining spheres. That is, apart from monitoring whether or not it remains in the variable winning device 35, the remaining ball outlet switches 112 and 113 are not opened even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open. When the game ball discharge is detected, it is abnormal discharge. For example, an illegal winning to the variable winning device 35 (that is, the left big winning port switch 103 or the right big winning port switch 104 detects the winning of the game ball). In this case, the discharge of the remaining sphere is detected.
The abnormal discharge monitoring process shown in FIG. 89 is for monitoring abnormal discharge of the game ball as described above (for example, illegal winning to the variable winning device 35).

Returning to the flow, if there is an input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step A111; YES), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by “+1” (step A112), and then the process proceeds to step A113. On the other hand, if there is no input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step A111; NO), the process jumps to step A113.
In step A113, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step A113). This is because the gaming control device 100 has an input signal from the right big prize opening switch 104 that has detected a winning to the variable prize winning device 35 (that is, the right big prize opening switch 104 won a prize to the variable prize winning device 35). Is detected).
If there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step A113; YES), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by "+1" (step A114), and then the process proceeds to step A115. On the other hand, if there is no input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step A113; NO), the process jumps to step A115.

If it progresses to step A115, it will be determined whether there exists any input in the discharge port switch 1 (1st remaining ball discharge port switch 112) (step A115). This is because the game control device 100 has an input signal from the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 that detects a state in which the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 35 to the outside (that is, the first remaining ball discharge). Whether the exit switch 112 has detected a game ball discharged from the variable winning device 35).
If there is an input to the discharge port switch 1 (first remaining ball discharge port switch 112) (step A115; YES), it is determined whether or not the abnormal discharge counter is “0” (step A116).
Here, if the abnormal discharge counter is “0”, the first remaining ball discharge port switch 112 is a game regardless of the state where there is no winning to the variable winning device 35 through the processing of Step A111 to Step A114 described above. Since the discharge of the ball is detected, there is a possibility of illegal winning in the variable winning device 35, for example. Therefore, if the abnormal discharge counter is “0” (step A116; YES), the process branches to step A121.
On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge counter is not “0” (step A116; NO), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by “−1” (step A117), and then the process proceeds to step A118.
If there is no input to the discharge port switch 1 (first remaining sphere discharge port switch 112) (step A115; NO), the process jumps to step A118.

In step A118, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge port switch 2 (second remaining ball discharge port switch 113) (step A118). This is because whether the game control device 100 has an input signal from the second remaining ball discharge port switch 113 that detects a state in which the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 35 to the outside (that is, the second remaining ball discharge). Whether the exit switch 113 has detected a game ball discharged from the variable winning device 35).
If there is an input to the discharge port switch 2 (second remaining ball discharge port switch 113) (step A118; YES), it is determined whether or not the abnormal discharge counter is “0” (step A119).
Here, if the abnormal discharge counter is “0”, there is no winning in the variable winning device 35 or the winning in the variable winning device 35 through the processing of the above-described steps A111 to A114. 1 The remaining ball discharge port switch 112 has detected that the game ball has been discharged and the abnormal discharge counter has returned to “0”. Since the ball discharge port switch 113 detects the discharge of the game ball, for example, there is a possibility of illegal winning to the variable winning device 35. Therefore, if the abnormal discharge counter is “0” (step A119; YES), the process branches to step A121.
On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge counter is not “0” (step A119; NO), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by “−1” (step A120), and then the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.
Also, when there is no input to the discharge port switch 2 (second remaining ball discharge port switch 113) (step A118; NO), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.

If it is determined that there is a possibility of abnormal discharge and the process proceeds to step A121, an abnormal discharge error flag area is prepared (step A121) and an abnormal discharge occurrence command is prepared (step A122). Next, a game stop error status update process is performed (step A123). As a result, an abnormal discharge error flag is set, a gaming state in which abnormal discharge has occurred is entered based on the abnormal discharge occurrence command, the game stop error status is updated, and an error is notified. After step A123, the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.
As described above, when the remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113 detect the discharge of the game ball even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not opened, it is abnormal discharge, for example, the variable winning device 35. The game is stopped because the game is illegally won (that is, the left big prize port switch 103 or the right big prize port switch 104 has not detected a winning game ball, but the discharge of the remaining ball is detected). Processing to update the error status is performed.

[Game stop error status update process]
Next, the game stop error status update process (step A123) in the abnormal discharge monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 90, in the game stop error status update process, first, an error occurrence flag is saved in the target error flag area (step A131), and it is determined whether or not an error for game stop has occurred. (Step A132). If an error to stop the game has occurred (step A132; NO), the game stop error status update process is terminated. Therefore, in this case, a serious error that stops the game has occurred, and the game is stopped.
On the other hand, if an error for stopping the game has not occurred (step A132; YES), an error operating flag is saved in the game stop error state area (step A133). Next, a timer initial value (for example, 10 s) is saved in the game stop error control timer area (step A134). Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step A135). Thus, the prepared error command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an error effect display corresponding to the error command prepared by the information display unit 45 is performed under the control of the effect control device 300. After step A135, the game stop error status update process is terminated.

[Unauthorized monitoring process]
Next, the fraud monitoring process (step S76) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 91, in the fraud monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the magnetic sensor 115 is on (step A141). This is to determine whether the magnetic sensor 115 is on, that is, detects abnormal magnetism, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 115 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3).
When the magnetic sensor 115 is on (step A141; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by “+1” (step A142). It is determined whether the value of the timer is less than a specified time (for example, 32 ms) (step A143).

When the value of the magnet fraud monitoring timer is less than the specified time (step A143; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms), a magnet fraud flag area is prepared (step A144). ) And a magnet fraud occurrence command are prepared (step A145), and then a game stop error status update process is performed (step A146). As a result, the occurrence of magnet fraud is confirmed, and the prepared magnet fraud occurrence command is sent to the production control device 300. Under the control of the production control device 300, an error corresponding to the magnet fraud occurrence command is displayed on the information display 45. An effect display is performed. After step A146, 1 is saved in the magnet fraud monitoring timer area (step A147), and the process proceeds to step A148.
On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor 115 is not on in step A141 (step A141; NO), it is determined that no magnet fraud has occurred, and the magnet fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to 0 (step A149). Then, it progresses to step A148.
Furthermore, if the magnet fraud monitoring timer is not less than the specified time in step A143 (step A143; NO), the routine jumps to step A148 and repeats the routine.

In step A148, it is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 114 is on (step A148). This is because the board radio wave sensor 114 is turned on, that is, an abnormal radio wave for the game board 30 is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 114 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3) ( That is, it is determined whether board radio wave fraud has occurred.
When the panel radio wave sensor 114 is on (step A148; YES), that is, when an abnormal board radio wave is detected, a board radio wave fraud flag area is prepared (step A150) and a board radio wave fraud occurrence command is prepared ( Step A151) Subsequently, game stop error status update correction is performed (step A152). As a result, the prepared board radio wave fraud occurrence command is sent to the production control device 300, and an error production display corresponding to the board radio wave fraud occurrence command is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the production control device 300. become. After step A152, the process proceeds to step A153.
On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor 114 is not on (step A148; NO), that is, if no abnormal panel radio wave is detected, the process jumps to step A153.

If it progresses to step A153, it will be determined whether the glass frame or the main body frame is open | released (step A153). This is because the opening of the glass frame 5 is detected by the glass frame opening detection switch 117 and, for example, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is in progress based on whether an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set. Similarly, the opening of the main body frame (front frame 4) is detected by the main body frame opening detection switch 118, and it is determined whether a main body frame opening error is occurring based on, for example, whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.
If the glass frame or the body frame is being opened (step A153; YES), the timer initial value is saved in the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area (step A154). For example, 3s is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the vibration for 3 seconds after the glass frame 5 or the main body frame (front frame 4) is closed is not treated as illegal vibration. After step A154, the vibration fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to 0 (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A156. On the other hand, if the glass frame or the main body frame is not being opened (step A153; NO), the process jumps to step A156.

In step A156, if the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step A156). Next, it is determined whether or not the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is “0” (step A157). If the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is not “0” (step A157; NO), the fraud monitoring process is terminated. Repeat routine.
On the other hand, if the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is “0” (step A157; YES), it is determined whether or not the vibration sensor 116 is on (step A158). This is because the vibration sensor 116 is turned on, that is, whether improper vibration with respect to the game board 30 is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the vibration sensor 116 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3) (that is, Whether vibration fraud has occurred).
If the vibration sensor 116 is not on (step A158; NO), that is, if no unauthorized vibration is detected, the vibration fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to 0 (step A166), and the fraud monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the vibration sensor 116 is on (step A158; YES), that is, when an improper vibration is detected, it is determined whether or not a special figure small hit is being made (step A159). If it is not in the special figure small hit (step A159; NO), the vibration fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to 0 (step A166), and the fraud monitoring process is terminated.
If the special figure is being hit (step A159; YES), it is determined that the vibration is illegal and the process proceeds to step A160. It is determined whether or not there is (step A161), and if the vibration fraud monitoring timer is not less than the specified time (step A161; NO), the fraud monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the vibration fraud monitoring timer is less than the specified time (step A161; YES), 1 is saved in the vibration fraud monitoring timer area (step S162), and a vibration fraud flag area is prepared (step A163). This is because, when the special figure is a small hit, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened, so that the game board 30 is vibrated with the intention of aiming for a big hit (V win) at that time. This is because it is determined that the vibration sensor 116 is turned on when the vibration sensor 116 is on particularly when the special figure is being hit.
Next, a vibration fraud occurrence command is prepared (step A164), and then a game stop error status update process is performed (step A165). Thus, the prepared vibration fraud occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an error effect display corresponding to the vibration fraud occurrence command is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. . After step A165, the fraud monitoring process is terminated.

(Launch control process)
Next, the firing control process (step S77) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 92, in the launch control process, first, it is determined whether or not an error for stopping the game has occurred (step A171). If an error to stop the game has occurred (step A171; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure game is in a special figure power-on operation process (step A172). If the special figure game is in the special figure power-on operation process (step A172; YES), the process branches to step A175, and the output data of the emission stop is saved in the emission permission signal area (step A175). Thereby, the launch of the game ball is stopped. After step A175, the firing control process is terminated.
This is because, in the power-on operation processing, a process such as returning the accessory motor in the accessory device 51 and the accessory motor in the determining device 80 to the initial position when the power is turned on can be started. Therefore, when the special figure game is in the special figure power-on operation process, the game ball is stopped from firing.

If the special figure game is not in the special figure power-on operation process (step A172; NO), the process proceeds to step A173 to determine whether any of the motors is in the ball biting process.
Here, the ball biting process operation of the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) (see FIGS. 34 (a) and (b)), the ball biting process operation of the drum accessory 62 (see FIG. 34 (c)), and When any of the ball biting process operations (see FIG. 34 (d)) of the round lottery item (determination device 80) is performed, it is determined that the ball biting process is being performed. If any of the motors is engaged in the ball biting process (step A173; YES), the process branches to step A175, and the output data of the emission stop is saved in the emission permission signal area (step A175). Thereby, the launch of the game ball is stopped. After step A175, the firing control process is terminated.
For example, when the ball engagement is caused inside the accessory device 51 or the determination device 80, for example, the accessory motor of the accessory device 51 is reversely rotated to cancel the ball engagement. This is because the ball motor is reversely rotated to cancel the ball biting, so that the launch of the game ball is stopped during such a ball biting processing operation. As described above, in the present embodiment, the launch of the game ball is stopped during the ball biting process operation, but it is also possible to configure so that the launch of the game ball is not stopped during the ball bite process operation.

If any of the motors is not in the ball biting process (step A173; NO), the process proceeds to step A174, and the output data of the emission permission is saved in the emission permission signal area (step A174). Thereby, the launch of the game ball is permitted. After step A174, the firing control process ends. Therefore, an error to stop the game has not occurred (step A171; YES), the special figure game is not in the special figure power-on operation process (step A173; NO), and the ball of any of the accessory motors is engaged. When the processing is not in progress (step A173; NO), the launch of the game ball is permitted.
On the other hand, if an error for stopping the game has occurred in step A171 (step A171; NO), the process branches to step A175, and the output data for stopping the firing is saved in the firing permission signal area (step A175). Thereby, the launch of the game ball is stopped. After step A175, the firing control process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the external information editing process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S65), the winning switch / status monitoring process (step S67), the remaining ball monitoring process (step A68), the fraud monitoring process (step S76), and the like. Then, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.
As shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, in the external information editing process, it is first determined whether or not a glass frame opening error has occurred (step A181). This is because the opening of the glass frame 5 is detected by the glass frame opening detection switch 117 and, for example, whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring is determined based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.
If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step A181; NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not the main body frame opening error is occurring (step A182). This is because the opening of the main body frame (front frame 4) is detected by the main body frame opening detection switch 118 and, for example, it is determined whether a main body frame opening error is occurring based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set. .
If the body frame opening error is not occurring (step A182; NO), the process proceeds to step A183, and the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A183). The door / frame opening signal is an opening signal of the glass frame 5 (door) and the front frame 4 (frame). As a result, the off data of the door / frame opening signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152.
Next, the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A184). As a result, the off-data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152. After step A184, the process proceeds to step A185.

On the other hand, if a glass frame opening error is occurring (step A181; YES) or a body frame opening error is occurring (step A182; YES), in either case, the process branches to step A186, The ON data of the frame release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A186). As a result, the ON data of the door / frame opening signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152.
Next, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A187). This is because a gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside when a gaming machine error status of opening the door or frame occurs. Thereby, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A187, the process proceeds to step A185.

In step A185, if the security signal control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated. The security signal control timer is for outputting a security signal for a predetermined time when power is turned on by clearing the RAM, and a timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S27. The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer has become “0” (step A188). The security signal control timer is for outputting a security signal for a predetermined time when the power is turned on by RAM clearing. For example, 256 ms is set as the timer initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (for example, step S27). Set.
If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step A188; YES), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, it is determined whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring ( Step A189).
If the frame radio wave fraud has not occurred (step A189; NO), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A190). As a result, the off-data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152. After step A190, the process proceeds to step A191.
On the other hand, if the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step A189; YES), the process branches to step A192 to save the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step A192). As a result, the ON data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152. After step A192, the process proceeds to step A191.

When the process proceeds to step A191, it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality is occurring (step A191). The occurrence of a switch abnormality herein refers to an error such as a connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 1 or the switch abnormality detection signal 2 described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 35, the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a. Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121b.
An error such as a connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is referred to as “abnormality 1”. An error such as a connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is referred to as “abnormal 2”.
In the process of step A191, it is determined that a switch abnormality is occurring regardless of whether "abnormality 1" or "abnormality 2" occurs.
If no switch abnormality is occurring (step A191; NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not an accessory error is occurring (step A193).
In the present embodiment, two accessory devices 51 and a determination device 80 are provided as target accessory devices. Among them, the drum accessory motor 66 and the V movable accessory motor 73 are arranged in the accessory device 51. The determining device 80 is provided with a round lottery accessory motor 88. Therefore, the occurrence of the accessory error here means that an accessory error is occurring regardless of any of the errors of the drum accessory motor 66, the V movable accessory motor 73, and the round lottery accessory motor 88. judge.

If no accessory error is occurring (step A193; NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step A194).
In the present embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring function is to monitor whether or not the game ball won in the variable winning device 35 is pulled out and remains in the variable winning device 35. In order to detect game balls discharged from the variable winning device 35 to the outside, remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113 are provided (as described in detail above). If there is a remaining ball even after a predetermined period of time, the remaining ball error is determined to be occurring.
If no residual sphere error is occurring (step A194; NO), the process proceeds to step A195.
On the other hand, when a switch abnormality is occurring (step A191; YES), an accessory error is occurring (step A193; YES), or a remaining ball error is occurring (step A194; YES), either If at least one determination is YES, the process proceeds to step A196, and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A196). This is because a gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside when a gaming machine error status occurs such as when a switch abnormality occurs, an accessory error occurs, or a remaining ball error occurs. Thereby, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A196, the process proceeds to step A195.

Proceeding to step A195, the following determination processing is performed in each step of step A197, step A198, step A199, step A200, step A201, and step A202, including step A195.
(A) Step A195: It is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring.
(B) Step A197: It is determined whether or not the magnet is illegal.
(C) Step A198: It is determined whether or not a board radio wave fraud is occurring.
(D) Step A199: It is determined whether or not vibration fraud is occurring.
(E) Step A200: It is determined whether or not a big prize opening fraud is occurring.
(F) Step A201: It is determined whether or not an abnormal start-up winning is occurring.
(G) Step A202: It is determined whether or not the start opening ball is clogged.
The abnormal discharge in Step A195 is an abnormality in which the remaining ball discharge port switches 112 and 113 detect the discharge of the game ball even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not opened. This is due to an illegal winning action on the device 35.
The magnet fraud in step A197 is a case where the magnetic sensor 115 is turned on and abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms).
The board radio fraud in step A198 is when the board radio wave sensor 114 is turned on and an abnormal radio wave for the game board 30 is detected.
The vibration improper of step A199 is a case where the vibration sensor 116 is turned on and an improper vibration with respect to the game board 30 is detected.
The illegal prize winning in step A200 is a case where the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 serving as a big prize opening are illegally opened to win a game ball.
The abnormal start opening winnings in step A201 is a case where an abnormally large number of winnings are detected within a predetermined time at at least one of the first starting winning openings 33a, 33b and the second starting winning opening 34.
The start opening ball clogging in step A202 is a case where an abnormality is detected such that the detection state (ON state) continues for a predetermined time or more in at least one of the first start winning opening 33a, 33b and the second starting winning opening 34. That is.
The determination that these abnormalities are occurring is made based on, for example, whether an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set or not.

Next, the determination result of step A195 is NO, the determination result of step A197 is NO, the determination result of step A198 is NO, the determination result of step A199 is NO, the determination result of step A200 is NO, the determination result of step A201 is NO, If the decision result in the step A202 is NO, the process advances to a step A203, and the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A203). Here, a gaming machine error status signal indicating that a gaming machine error status such as abnormal discharge, magnet fraud, board radio fraud, vibration fraud, large winning prize fraud, starting opening abnormal prize winning, or starting mouth ball clogging has not occurred This is because it outputs to. Thereby, off data of the gaming machine error state signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A203, the process proceeds to step A206.
On the other hand, if at least one of step A195, step A197, step A198, step A199, step A200, step A201, and step A202 is judged YES, the process branches to step A204. This is to inform the outside of the fraud if there is a determination result that at least one fraud is occurring among Step A195, Step A197, Step A198, Step A199, Step A200, Step A201, and Step A202. .
In step A204, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step A204). As a result, the ON data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152. Next, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A205). This is because when one of the gaming machine error conditions is illegal among abnormal discharge, magnet fraud, board radio fraud, vibration fraud, large prize opening fraud, start opening abnormal prize winning, and starting mouth ball clogging, This is to output a machine error state signal to the outside. Thereby, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A205, the process proceeds to step A206.

In step A206, the address of the main prize ball signal control area is prepared (step A206), the on data of the main prize ball signal is prepared (step A207), and then the pulse signal editing process is performed (step A208). ). This is because the game control device 100 outputs one pulse of the main winning ball signal every time the number of winning balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). In addition, the signal is edited.
Next, an address of the winning prize signal control area is prepared (step A209), and on data of the winning prize signal is prepared (step A210), and then a pulse signal editing process is performed (step A211). This is to edit the signal so that the game control device 100 outputs one pulse of the winning prize signal every time the winning prize is counted. The prize winnings refers to winning in the variable winning device 35 as a big winning opening.

Next, the address of the start port 1 signal control area is prepared (step A212), and ON data of the start port 1 signal is prepared (step A213), and then a pulse signal editing process is performed (step A214). This is to edit the signal so that the game control device 100 outputs one pulse of the start port 1 signal each time the winning at the start port 1 is counted. The start port 1 signal is a signal corresponding to winning in the first start winning ports 33a and 33b.
Next, the address of the start port 2 signal control area is prepared (step A215), and ON data of the start port 2 signal is prepared (step A216), and then the pulse signal editing process is performed (step A217). This is to edit the signal so that the game control device 100 outputs one pulse of the start port 2 signal each time the winning at the start port 2 is counted. The start port 2 signal is a signal corresponding to winning at the second start winning port 34.

Next, if the accessory count control timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step A218). The accessory count control timer is a timer for performing a control for outputting a signal for a predetermined time (for example, 128 ms) every time the special winning opening is opened by the special figure small hit (that is, the large winning opening in the starting game). Therefore, the accessory release frequency signal is output in one pulse when released once in the start game, and two pulses when released twice. Next, it is determined whether or not the accessory count control timer is “0” (step A219). If the accessory count control timer is “0” (step A219; YES), the off data of the accessory count signal is displayed. Is saved in the external information output data area (step A220). Thereby, the off data of the accessory frequency signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A220, the external information editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the accessory count control timer is not “0” (step A219; NO), the ON data of the accessory count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A221). Thereby, the ON data of the accessory frequency signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A221, the external information editing process is terminated.

[Pulse signal editing processing]
Next, pulse signal editing processing (step A208, step A211, step A214, step A217) in the external information editing processing will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 95A, in the pulse signal editing process, first, unless the output control timer of the target signal is “0”, “−1” is updated (step A231). The minimum value of the output control timer for the target signal is set to “0”.
The target signal is which signal of the main prize ball signal, the winning combination signal, the start port 1 signal, and the start port 2 signal described in FIG. 94 is the target of editing in the current pulse signal editing process. It is a signal that points to.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the output control timer of the target signal is “0” (step A232). If the value of the output control timer of the target signal is “0” (step A232; YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of outputs of the target signal is “0” (step A233). . If the target signal output count is not “0” (step A233; NO), the target signal output count is updated by “−1” (step A234).
Next, the main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is saved in the output control timer area of the target signal (step A235). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the target signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A236), and the pulse signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the target signal output count is “0” (step A233; YES), the off data for turning off the target signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step A238), the pulse signal editing process is terminated.
Further, when the value of the output control timer of the target signal is not “0” (step A232; NO), it is determined whether or not the output control timer of the target signal is in the output on period (step A237). Note that the output control timer for the target signal is in the output-on period means that the value of the output control timer for the target signal is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).
If the output control timer for the target signal is in the output on period (step A237; YES), the process proceeds to step A236. If the target signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step A237; NO), the off data for turning off the target signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step A238), the pulse signal editing process is terminated.

Here, a specific example of the pulse signal editing process when the target signal is, for example, a main prize ball signal will be described. Note that the same pulse signal editing process is performed even if the target signal is a bonus prize signal other than the main prize ball signal, a start port 1 signal, or a start port 2 signal.
That is, when the target signal is the main prize ball signal, the main prize ball signal is sent from the game control device 100 to the external device (for example, an external device (for example, external) Management device). Note that the payout control device 200 outputs a one-pulse prize ball signal generated every 10 payouts to an external device (for example, an external management device).
That is, the game control apparatus 100 (main board) updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by “+1” for every 10 scheduled payouts (each time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process), and then The main prize ball number signal is output as many times as the number of updated (set) outputs. Then, in response to the main award ball signal output for every 10 payout schedules as described above, the award ball signal is transmitted when 10 payouts are actually made from the payout control device 200 (payout board). By matching the schedule and the result, it is possible to cope with illegal payout.

In addition, it becomes possible to determine when a winning has occurred from the main prize ball signal by a management device or the like as an external device, which helps the policy in hall sales.
Specifically, it can be determined whether a winning occurs during a big hit or a winning that occurs during a normal game. For example, it is not strange to win a lot of prizes during a big hit, but if there are a lot of prizes during normal games, it can be judged that the nail adjustment is too sweet. become.
On the other hand, if the main prize ball signal is not output to the external device, but only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 that is output when the payout is completed, the payout is performed because the ball has run out during the big hit. In other words, it is impossible to determine when a winning has occurred when, for example, when the replenishment is delayed after the jackpot is over.
For this reason, if the replenishment is delayed after the end of the jackpot, there will be a large number of winnings (payouts) during normal games, which may lead to inadequacies in sales data. There is sex.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, both the main prize ball signal and the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used together, and the main prize ball signal is output immediately after winning a prize. The problem disappears.

[Transmission timing chart of main prize ball signal]
Next, a specific example of transmission of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG.
In FIG. 95 (b), when the target signal is the main prize ball signal, the main prize ball signal is externally output from the game control device 100 with one pulse of the main prize ball signal for every 10 prize balls to be paid out. The data is output to a device (for example, an external management device).
Here, the main award ball signal of one pulse has a main award ball signal ON state (for example, high level) time of 128 ms, as shown in FIG. 95 (b) with the main award ball signal as an output signal. A one-pulse signal is formed in such a manner that the time of the main prize ball signal in the off state (for example, low level) is 64 ms. Therefore, the total of one pulse is 128 ms + 64 ms = 192 ms.
The value of the output control timer for the target main prize ball signal is “48” when the main prize ball signal is turned on, “16” when the main prize ball signal is turned off, and the main prize ball signal is turned off. Is “0” at the timing of the last time point.

In this way, one pulse of the main prize ball signal is formed in a manner as shown in FIG. 95 (b), and the game control device 100 generates one pulse of the main prize ball signal for every 10 prize balls to be paid out. Output to an external device. It should be noted that one pulse prize ball signal generated every 10 payouts is also output from the payout control device 200 to the external device.
Accordingly, the game control device 100 (main board) outputs a main award ball signal of 1 pulse for every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted), and 10 actually from the payout control apparatus 200 (payout board). When a payout is made, an award ball signal is transmitted, so that a match between the schedule and the result can be taken to cope with an illegal payout.
In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, if the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc., and it is paid out after the big hit, it has not been possible to determine whether or not the ball is due to a big hit only with the conventional prize ball signal. However, in this embodiment, the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning is added, so that the hall management device can collect (determine) accurate information.

E. Outline of Game Next, an outline of a game performed in the pachinko machine 1 of this example and a flow of the game will be described.
At the beginning of the game (or before the game), the customer is waiting (during the demonstration), and a command for instructing display of the customer waiting screen is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, The information display 45 displays an effect waiting for the customer.
Then, when the player operates the launch operation handle 11 to start the game, the game ball at the launch position is driven into the game area 32 via the guide rail 31, and the game ball that has been driven is first started. When a prize is entered in any of the winning openings 33a and 33b, the collective display device 50 displays the variation of the special figure 1 and the information display 45 displays the variation of the decorative special figure. In addition, the game balls that have been removed without winning the first start winning holes 33a and 33b flow into the out hole 37.
When a game ball wins one of the first start winning ports 33a and 33b, the special display 1 of the collective display device 50 changes for a predetermined time, and the variable winning device 35 ( The movable members 43a and 43b of the (big prize opening) perform the opening operation once.

When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 34, the special display 2 of the collective display device 50 changes for a predetermined time, and the movable member 43a of the variable winning device 35 in the result mode of all the stop symbols. 43b perform the opening operation twice.
Note that the small win is the opening of the large winning opening when the winning winning opening (all starting winning openings of the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b and the second starting winning opening 34) is won (the fluctuation of the variable winning apparatus 35). This is the operation from the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the winning device 35 until the game ball passes through the specific area and wins a V. Until the ending time per hit.
As described above, when the small hit is once released, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state) and closed again after a predetermined time (400 msec in this case). The opening operation in a predetermined manner is performed once. In addition, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened by sandwiching a closing operation for a predetermined time (here, 1000 msec) through an opening operation in a predetermined mode (here, an opening operation having an opening time of 400 msec). Performed once.
Further, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening), the special figure is held (holding of the special figure 2) only for one. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first start opening), the special figure is not held (the special figure 1 is not held).

Further, in this embodiment, when winning is made at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b or the second starting winning opening 34), all the results of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 on the collective display device 50 are obtained. It is a small hit and there is no losing. That is, when the start prize is received, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened in the variable winning device 35, and the number of times the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened due to the difference in the stop pattern of FIG. 1 or FIG. Is different.
In the small hitting operation, there are a case where the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once and a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice, which are shown in FIG. 73 (b). The upper part of FIG. 73 (b) is a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once as a small hit, and the lower part of FIG. 73 (b) is a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice as a small hit. is there.
As shown in the upper part of FIG. 73 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state), and predetermined A predetermined mode of opening operation is performed once after a lapse of time (here, 400 ms has elapsed). Therefore, in the case of releasing once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 400 ms, and the small amount of the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within this period. A hit operation is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 73 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened twice, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state). Then, the opening operation in a predetermined manner in which the closing operation is performed again after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 400 ms has elapsed) is repeated twice. In this case, the first opening period of the movable members 43a and 43b is, for example, 400 ms. Subsequently, the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after the elapse of 400 ms, and then a predetermined wait time (1000 ms) is provided. Then, the movable members 43a and 43b continue to be closed, and at the same time as the predetermined wait time ends, the second opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b is performed. The opening period of the second movable members 43a and 43b is also 400 m, for example. Therefore, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 400 ms, and the operation is performed twice with a predetermined wait time. Then, a small hitting operation is performed in such a manner that the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within the period in which the opening operation is performed twice.

  When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation once or twice by the small hitting operation, the game ball becomes the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35 at the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b open. The inflowing game ball is guided to the floor portion 61 by the ball flow path formed by the flow path forming member 47. And if the said game ball contacts the magnet arrangement | positioning location of the drum role 62 before the clearance gap between the floor part 61 and the drum role 62 becomes larger than the diameter of a game ball, the said game ball will become constant speed | rate. It is lifted by the rotating drum accessory 62 and guided to the guide surface portion 62d1 of the guide member 63d. On the other hand, if the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum accessory 62 becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball before the game ball contacts the magnet arrangement position of the drum accessory 62, the game ball is removed from the gap. It falls and is discharged to the outside through the discharge channel in the variable winning device.

The game ball guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 of the guide member 63d is stored in the game ball storage portion 77a of the V movable member 77, or falls from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b. When the game ball falls from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b, the game ball falls from the gap and is discharged to the outside through the discharge flow path in the variable winning device. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77, the game ball is removed from the V movable member 77 when the V movable member 77 arrives at the determining device guiding position. It falls and flows into the determination device 80.
The game ball that has flowed into the determining device 80 is placed in any one of the first V winning guiding portion 82b1, the second V winning guiding portion 82b2, and the third V winning guiding portion 82b3 formed on the horizontal movable member 82 rotating at a constant speed. Inflow. When the game ball flows into the third V winning guiding portion 82b3, the game ball flows into the third specific area (V winning), and thus a “16R big hit” occurs. In addition, when the game ball flows into the second V winning guiding portion 82b2, the game ball flows into the second specific area (V winning), so that “per 8R” or “16R big hit” occurs. In addition, when the game ball flows into the first V prize guiding portion 82b1, the game ball flows into the first specific area (V prize), and therefore, “per 5R” or “16R big hit” occurs.

  However, even when the game ball flows into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1, the timing at which the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 arrives at the 12 o'clock position in the horizontal movable member 82 and the magnet of the vertical movable member 85 If the timing at which one of the placement locations arrives at the 6 o'clock position on the vertical movable member 85 is substantially the same, the game ball is identified corresponding to the jackpot state (special game state) that is most unfavorable to the player. There is a possibility of flowing into the fourth specific area, which is the specific area corresponding to the jackpot state that is most advantageous for the player, instead of the first specific area that is the area. Specifically, the timing at which the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 arrives at the 12 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82 and any of the magnet arrangement positions on the vertical movable member 85 are at the 6 o'clock position on the vertical movable member 85. When the arrival timing substantially matches, the game ball comes into contact with the magnet arrangement location, and is therefore lifted by the vertical movable member 85 rotating at a constant speed. Then, when the game ball flows into the fourth specific area 86a as a result of being lifted by the vertical movable member 85, the game ball flows into the fourth specific area (V winning), and thus “16R big hit” occurs.

FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the distribution between the open pattern and the big hit round in the special figure 1, and FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the distribution between the open pattern and the big hit round in the special figure 2. is there.
In this embodiment, when a game ball wins a start winning opening (first start winning opening 33a, 33b or second start winning opening 34), the result of the variable display of special figure 1 or special figure 2 on the collective display device 50 is as follows. All are small hits, and the opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 is performed.
At this time, if the special figure 1 fluctuates, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), the “special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 1” is selected at the distribution rate of 80%, and the “special figure 1” is selected at the distribution rate of 10%. "1 stop symbol pattern 2" is selected, and "Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 3" is selected at a distribution rate of 10%. In the case of special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), “Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1” is selected at a distribution rate of 70%, and “Special figure 2 stop” is selected at a distribution rate of 10%. "Design pattern 2" is selected, and "Special figure 2 stop design pattern 3" is selected at a distribution rate of 20%.

When the movable members 43 a and 43 b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation, the game ball can enter the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35. The game ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 is first guided to the floor portion 61 and lifted by the drum role 62 and guided to the guide surface portion 63d1, or falls from the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum role 62. (I.e., miss the V prize).
Whether the game ball guided to the guide surface portion 63d1 is stored in the game ball storage portion 77a of the V movable member 77 or falls from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b (that is, misses the V prize) Either.
A game ball that has missed the V prize, that is, a game ball that has fallen from the gap between the floor portion 61 and the drum role 62, or a game ball that has fallen from the gap between the guide surface portion 63d1 and the back member 63b is discharged in the variable prize winning device 35. It passes through the flow path and is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 35. When the game ball passes through the discharge channel, it is not a big hit but only a prize to the variable winning device 35, and there is only a predetermined number of prize balls.
On the other hand, the game balls accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 77a of the V movable member 77 are guided to the determination device 80, and the first specific region, the second specific region, the third specific region, and the first specific region of the determination device 80 Inflow into one of the four specific areas (V prize). When a game ball wins a V, a big hit occurs.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), when the game ball flows into the specific area 1 (first specific area), the stop selected in advance (selected at the start of the special figure variation display game, etc.) The symbol pattern is “stop symbol pattern 1” (specifically “special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern 1”, “special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern 1”) or “stop symbol pattern 2” (specifically “special symbol 1”. In the case of “stop symbol pattern 2” and “special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern 2”), a big hit “per 5R” occurs, and the preselected stop symbol pattern is “stop symbol pattern 3” (specifically Is “Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 3”, “Special Figure 2 Stop Symbol Pattern 3”), a big hit “per 16R” occurs.
Further, when the game ball flows into the specific area 2 (second specific area), if the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is “stop symbol pattern 1” or “stop symbol pattern 2”, the big hit is “per 8R. ”Occurs and the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is“ stop symbol pattern 3 ”,“ 16R big hit ”is generated as a big hit.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), in the case of the special figure 1, the single opening is selected as the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit, and in the case of the special figure 2, the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit. Open twice is selected. That is, the special pattern 2 is a more advantageous opening pattern for the player.
“Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 1” has an allocation rate of 80%, “Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 2” has an allocation rate of 10%, and “Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 3” has an allocation rate of 10%. Since the rate is selected in the case of FIG. 1 and the game ball flows into the first specific area, the occurrence rate of “per 5R” is 90% (= 80% + 10%), and “16R The occurrence rate of “big hit” is 10%.
On the other hand, “Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1” has a distribution rate of 70%, “Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 2” has a distribution rate of 10%, and “Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3” has a distribution rate of 20%. Since the rate is selected in the case of FIG. 2 and the game ball flows into the first specific area, the occurrence rate of “per 5R” is 80% (= 70% + 10%), and “16R The occurrence rate of “big hit” is 20%.
Therefore, in the case of the special figure 2 (that is, the case where the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is advantageous to the player), the case of the special figure 1 (that is, the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is advantageous to the player). The occurrence rate of “16R jackpot” (that is, the jackpot rate that is more advantageous for the player) is higher than the disadvantageous case.

Similarly, in the case of FIG. 1, when the game ball flows into the second specific area, the occurrence rate of “per 8R” is 90%, and the occurrence rate of “16R big hit” is 10%. In the case of the special figure 2, when the game ball flows into the second specific area, the occurrence rate of “per 8R” is 80% and the occurrence rate of “16R big hit” is 20%. The case of FIG. 2 (that is, the case where the big winning opening opening pattern at the small hit is advantageous to the player) is the case of the special figure 1 (that is, the case where the big winning opening opening pattern at the small hit is disadvantageous for the player). ) Has a higher occurrence rate of “16R jackpot” (that is, a jackpot rate that is more advantageous to the player).
Also, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), when the game ball passes the specific area 3 (third specific area), the occurrence rate of “16R big hit” is 100%. That is, “16R big hit” occurs regardless of the type of special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) or the stop symbol pattern.
Similarly, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4 (fourth specific area), the occurrence rate of “16R big hit” is 100%.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the case of special figure 2 (that is, the case where the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is a two-time opening advantageous for the player) is the case of special figure 1 (ie, The occurrence rate of “16R jackpot” (that is, the jackpot rate that is more advantageous to the player) is higher than the case where the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit is one open that is disadvantageous for the player.
In the so-called “blade” type pachinko machines (including the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment), the winning in a specific area in the start game is counted as one round, so the actual big hit (special game state) is in progress. The number of rounds is reduced by one round. Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, when “16R big hit” occurs, the result of subtracting only one round from the 16 rounds in relation to the game is played, and round games for 15 rounds are performed.

When the game ball passes the specific area 3 (third specific area) or the fourth specific area (specific area 4), no effect is given during the fanfare period (or a short effect is given) regardless of the stop symbol pattern. Therefore, “10 seconds” is set as the length of the fanfare period (that is, the big hit fanfare time).
Similarly, when the game ball passes through the specific area 1 (first specific area) or the specific area 2 (second specific area), and the stop symbol pattern selected in advance is “stop symbol pattern 1”. In addition, since no effect is performed during the fanfare period (or a short effect is performed), “10 seconds” is set as the length of the fanfare period.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes the specific area 1 (first specific area) or the specific area 2 (second specific area), the stop symbol pattern selected in advance is “stop symbol pattern 2” or “stop symbol” In the case of “Pattern 3”, during the fanfare period, a round lottery effect in which the number of rounds is apparently drawn is executed as an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds. Is set.

FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the distribution between the open pattern and the jackpot round in FIG. 1, and FIG. 97 (b) shows a modified example of the distribution of the open pattern and the jackpot round in FIG. FIG.
In this modified example, when the special figure 1 fluctuates, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), the “special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 1” is selected at the distribution rate of 80%, and the distribution rate is 10%. "Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 2" is selected, "Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 3" is selected at a distribution rate of 5%, and "Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4" is selected at a distribution rate of 5% Is done. In the case of special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), "Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1" is selected at a distribution rate of 80%, and "Special figure 2 stop" is selected at a distribution rate of 10%. "Design pattern 2" is selected, and "Special figure 2 stop design pattern 3" is selected at a distribution rate of 10%.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), when a game ball flows into the specific area 1 (first specific area), the stop symbol pattern selected in advance is “stop symbol pattern 1” or “stop symbol pattern 2”. ”Is generated as a big hit,“ per 5R ”, and when the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is“ stop symbol pattern 3 ”,“ per 16R ”is generated as a big hit. Furthermore, even when the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is “stop symbol pattern 4” (specifically, “special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern 4”), “per 16R” is generated as a big hit.
Further, when the game ball flows into the specific area 2 (second specific area), if the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is “stop symbol pattern 1” or “stop symbol pattern 2”, the big hit is “per 8R. ”Occurs and the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is“ stop symbol pattern 3 ”,“ 16R big hit ”is generated as a big hit. Furthermore, even when the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is “stop symbol pattern 4” (specifically, “special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern 4”), “per 16R” is generated as a big hit.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), when the pre-selected stop symbol pattern is “special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4”), the special winning opening opening pattern for small hits is released twice. In the case of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure 1, one or two opening is selected as the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit, and in the case of the special figure 2, the opening of the double winning opening in the small hit is made twice. Selected.
“Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 1” has an allocation rate of 80%, “Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 2” has an allocation rate of 10%, and “Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 3” has an allocation rate of 5%. Since “Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 4” is selected at a distribution rate of 5%, in the case of Special Figure 1 and a game ball flows into the first specific area, “per 5R” Is 90% (= 80% + 10%), and “16R big hit” is 10% (= 5% + 5%).
On the other hand, “Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1” has an allocation rate of 80%, “Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 2” has an allocation rate of 10%, and “Special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3” has an allocation rate of 10%. Since it is selected by rate, even in the case of the special figure 2 and when the game ball flows into the first specific area, the occurrence rate of “per 5R” becomes 90% (= 70% + 10%), and “16R The occurrence rate of “big hit” is 10%.
Therefore, the case where the big winning opening opening pattern at the small hit is advantageous for the player (that is, when “Special Figure 1 Stop Symbol Pattern 4” in Special Figure 1 is selected, Special Figure 2). , “16R big hit” occurs more than the case where the big prize opening pattern at the small hit is disadvantageous for the player (that is, the case other than “Special figure 1 stop symbol pattern 4” in special figure 1 is selected) The rate (that is, the jackpot rate that is more advantageous to the player) is higher.

Similarly, in the case of special figure 1 and when a game ball flows into the second specific area, the occurrence rate of “per 8R” is 90%, and the occurrence rate of “16R big hit” is 10%. Even in the case of special figure 2 and when a game ball flows into the second specific area, the occurrence rate of “per 8R” is 90% and the occurrence rate of “16R big hit” is 10%. The occurrence rate of “16R jackpot” (that is, more for the player) when the big winning opening opening pattern at the hit is more advantageous for the player than when the big opening opening pattern at the lower hit is disadvantageous for the player The rate of favorable jackpots) is high.
As shown in FIGS. 97A and 97B, when the game ball passes through the specific area 3 (third specific area), the occurrence rate of “16R big hit” is 100%.
Similarly, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4 (fourth specific area), the occurrence rate of “16R big hit” is 100%.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the big winning opening opening pattern at the small hit is advantageous for the player (when it is opened twice), the big winning opening opening pattern at the small hit is disadvantageous for the player. The occurrence rate of “16R jackpot” (that is, the jackpot rate that is more advantageous for the player) is higher than the case (in the case of opening once).
Furthermore, in the present modification, only two-time opening is selected in the case of FIG. 2, and even in the case of FIG. Therefore, as in the embodiment (see FIGS. 96 (a) and (b)), in the case of the special figure 1, only one-time opening is selected, and in the case of the special figure 2, only two-time opening is selected. In comparison, since the rate of opening twice (that is, the rate of opening pattern advantageous to the player) increases, the game ball wins the variable winning device 35 (specifically, the game ball flows into the winning space 41). As a result, the occurrence rate of “16R jackpot” (that is, the jackpot occurrence rate more advantageous for the player) can be increased.

FIG. 98 shows an example of the return operation of the V movable accessory at the end of the small hit when the V movable accessory (V movable member 77) is on the right side of the initial position, and FIG. An example of the return operation of the V movable accessory at the end of the small hit when the (V movable member 77) is on the left side of the initial position is shown.
In step S724 of the small hit remaining ball process (see FIG. 74), a process of setting the value of the control pointer for returning from the current position of the V movable member 77 to the center position (initial position) in the shortest time is performed. Specifically, when the current position of the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the initial position, a value for moving the V movable member 77 to the left is set as the value of the control pointer, and the current V movable member is set. When the position 77 is on the left side of the initial position, a process for setting a value for moving the V movable member 77 to the right is performed as the value of the control pointer.
Next, in step S725, it is determined whether or not the value of the control pointer set in step S724 is the same as the value currently being controlled. If not, the process proceeds to step S726. Processing for saving the value of the control pointer set in step S724 is performed.
By these processes, the V movable accessory motor 73 is controlled as shown in FIG. 98 when the current position of the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the initial position, and the current position of the V movable member 77 is changed. If it is on the left side of the initial position, control is performed as shown in FIG.

Specifically, for example, when the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the initial position and the current traveling direction of the V movable member 77 is the left direction, the value of the control pointer in step S724. Since the value for moving the V movable member 77 to the left is set and determined to be the same in step S725, the rotation direction of the V movable accessory motor 73 is not switched before and after the small hit end determination time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the V movable accessory motor 73 rotates in the same direction as that immediately before the small hit end determination time (that is, counterclockwise rotation) without temporarily stopping at the small hit end determination time. ).
Further, for example, when the V movable member 77 is on the right side of the initial position and the current traveling direction of the V movable member 77 is the right direction, the value of the control pointer is V movable in step S724. A value for moving the member 77 to the left is set, and it is determined in step S725 that they are not the same. Therefore, the rotational direction of the V movable accessory motor 73 is switched around the small hitting end determination time. At that time, in order to suppress damage or deterioration of the drive mechanism (including the V movable accessory motor 73), the rotation direction is switched with a temporary stop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the V movable accessory motor 73 stops at the time of the small hit end determination, and after a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds) has elapsed, the V movable accessory motor 73 is in the opposite direction to that immediately before the small hit end determination time. Rotate (ie counterclockwise).

Further, for example, when the V movable member 77 is on the left side of the initial position and the current moving direction of the V movable member 77 is the left direction, the V movable member 77 is used as the value of the control pointer in step S724. Since the value for moving the member 77 to the right is set and it is determined in step S725 that they are not the same, the rotation direction of the V movable accessory motor 73 is switched around the small hitting end determination time. At that time, in order to suppress damage or deterioration of the drive mechanism (including the V movable accessory motor 73), the rotation direction is switched with a temporary stop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), the V movable accessory motor 73 stops at the small hit end determination time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds) has elapsed, the V movable accessory motor 73 is in the opposite direction to that immediately before the small hit end determination time. Rotate (ie, rotate clockwise).
Further, for example, if the V movable member 77 is on the left side of the initial position and the current traveling direction of the V movable member 77 is the right direction, the value of the control pointer is V movable in step S724. Since a value for moving the member 77 to the right is set and it is determined in step S725 that the values are the same, the rotation direction of the V movable accessory motor 73 is not switched before and after the small hit end determination time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the V movable accessory motor 73 rotates in the same direction as that immediately before the small hit end determination time (that is, clockwise rotation) without temporarily stopping at the small hit end determination time. Continue.

The determination device 80 can also be mounted on a so-called one-type pachinko machine. An example is shown in FIG.
FIG. 100 is a front view of the game board 30 of the one-type pachinko machine on which the determination device 80 is mounted.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 20 provided with a display device 21 is arranged at substantially the center. The display device 21 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 20 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 20. That is, the center case 20 surrounds the periphery of the display area of the display device 21, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 21, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 21 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 21, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

On the lower right side of the center case 20 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (normal start gate) 24 for giving a start condition for the normal variation display game. A game ball won in the usual start gate 24 is detected by a gate switch.
In the game area 32, three general winning openings 25 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 20, and one general winning prize is on the lower right side of the center case 20 and below the normal start gate 24. A mouth 25 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 25 are detected by a prize opening switch.

In addition, a start winning opening 26 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided below the center case 20 in the game area 32. A game ball won in the start winning opening 26 is detected by the start opening 1 switch.
Also, below the start winning opening 26, an ordinary variable winning apparatus 27 (second start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided.
The normal variation winning device 27 includes a movable member 27a that can be converted into a state in which the game ball can be easily opened by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. The movable member 27a maintains a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which a game ball cannot normally flow. Then, when the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, an open state in which the game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation winning device 27 by the general electric solenoid as the driving device (advantageous for the player). To be changed to a new state). A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 27 is detected by the start port 2 switch.
In addition, below the normal variation winning device 27, an out port 37 is provided for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like.

Further, to the right of the start winning opening 26, there is disposed a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 28 that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game. Yes.
The special variation winning device 28 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 28a that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state is converted from a closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). In other words, the special variable winning device 28 includes a large winning opening that is opened and closed by, for example, an open / close door 28a that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid as a driving device, and during the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, By converting the closed state from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Note that a big prize opening switch (count switch) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is arranged inside the big prize opening (winning area).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 20 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 20 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim for winning at the start winning opening 26 or the normal variable winning device 27 by adjusting the firing force and firing the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), and to the right game area. By launching a game ball (so-called “right-handed”), it is possible to aim to win the normal start gate 24 and the special variable winning device 28.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a warp device 22 is provided on the left portion of the center case 20. The warp device 22 has an inflow port 22a opened to the left for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 20, and a cylindrical shape for guiding the game ball flowing into the inflow port 22a to the stage 22b. The game ball having a warp channel and flowing down the warp channel is guided to the left end of the stage 22b.

  A collective display device 50 for displaying various information is provided outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right portion of the game board 30).

  In the gaming machine 1 of this modification, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 24 and the general winning opening 25 The winning prize opening 26, the normal variable prize winning device 27 or the special variable prize winning device 28 are won, or they flow into the out port 37 provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and are discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 25, the start winning opening 26, the normal variation winning apparatus 27, or the special variable winning apparatus 28, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning opening is given by the payout control apparatus 200. From the controlled dispensing unit, the glass frame 5 is discharged to the upper plate 7 or the lower plate 10.

  On the other hand, a gate switch including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 24 is provided in the general diagram start gate 24 and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 24, it is detected by the gate switch and the usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 24, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual figure variation display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a fluctuation display unit (ordinary figure display) constituted by LEDs, and the lighting mode and lighting color of the LEDs are normally identified. Makes information (general, normal). In addition, the general map display is configured by a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. May be. If the stop display of the usual figure change display game is the usual figure specifying result, it becomes a hit of the ordinary figure, and the movable member 27a of the normal fluctuation winning device 27 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 27, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 26 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 27 are respectively detected by a starting port 1 switch and a starting port 2 switch provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 26 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game balls that have won the winning device 27 are detected as start winning balls of the second special figure variation display game, and are stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In addition, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information when the starting winning ball is detected, and the extracted random number value is stored in a special figure storage area in the game control device 100. (Part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the memory display section (the special figure 1 hold display, the special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and the center case 20. Is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 is configured to display the special display 1 (variable display device) or the special display 2 display of the collective display device 50 based on the winning at the start winning opening 26 or the normal variable winning device 27 or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played with the (variation display device). The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special-figure display game that displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) on the display device (image display device) 21 is executed. As a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display of the collective display device 50 becomes a special result mode (special result), it becomes a big hit and special It becomes a gaming state (so-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 21 is also a special result mode. Further, as a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display of the collective display device 50 is the small hit result mode, the small hit game is obtained. It becomes a state (so-called small hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 21 is also the small hit result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 21, a special decoration symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers or the like on the display device 21 is displayed as a left variation display region (first special symbol), and a right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 21 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effects such as the appearance of a character are performed to enhance the interest.

  The special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display of the collective display device 50 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special display is not performed independently or simultaneously. A figure change display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 21 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 1 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 21. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is to be executed (executed with priority).

  In the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the start memory number is 0, the start winning opening 26 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 27) is provided. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 26 (or the normal variable winning device 27) in the state of not being played, in the special game state or in the small hit game state, if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number, The start memory number is incremented by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state, At the end of the small hit gaming state), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

Next, game control performed in the game control apparatus 100 will be described.
The CPU 171A of the game microcomputer 171 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch provided in the normal figure start gate 24 and stores it in the ROM 171B. Compared with the stored determination value, a process for determining a missed hit of the normal map display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the universal symbol display device of the collective display device 50, a process for displaying the universal symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this normal figure change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first per stop symbol to the third per stop symbol is displayed on the general purpose display of the collective display device 50, and The electric solenoid is operated to perform control for opening the movable member 27a of the normal variation winning device 27 for a predetermined time as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 27a). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display of the collective display device 50.

  Also, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 1 switch provided in the starting winning opening 26, and the big win of the first special figure variation display game is stored based on the start memory. A determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 171B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch provided in the normal variation winning device 27, and based on this start memory, the big hit determination disturbance of the second special figure variable display game is stored. A numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 171B, and a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 171A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display or special figure 2 display of the collective display device 50, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (first start winning opening 26, normal variable winning apparatus 27). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 21 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, the production control device 300 performs production state setting, sound output from the speakers 13a, 13b, and 13c, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 171A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, displays the special result mode or the small hit result on the special figure 1 display or special figure 2 display of the collective display device 50. While displaying an aspect, the process which generates a special game state and a small hit game state is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, the CPU 171A, for example, opens the open / close door 28a of the special variable prize device 28 by a big prize opening solenoid, and allows a game ball to flow into the big prize opening. Control. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, control is performed to display the result form of the deviation on the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display of the collective display device 50.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state (probability change state) as the game state after the special game state ends based on the lottery result by the determination device 80. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

For example, in the game board 30 shown in FIG. 100, the flow path device 23 is disposed above the warp device 22, and the determination device 80 is disposed behind the stage 22b.
The flow path device 23 includes an inflow port 23a opened to the left for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 20, and a cylinder for guiding the game ball flowing into the inflow port 23a to the determination device 80. The game ball that has flowed down the flow path is guided to the inflow port formed by the inflow port forming member 83.
The inflow port 23 is provided with an entry restricting member 23b for opening and closing the inflow port 23. The entry restricting member 23b is opened when a special gaming state occurs.
When the special game state occurs and the entry restricting member 23b is opened and the game ball flows into the inflow port 23a, the game ball is guided to the determination device 80 by the flow path device 23. And it flows into a specific area (for example, the 2nd specific area, the 3rd specific area, the 4th specific area), or flows into a non-specific area (for example, the 1st specific area). When a game ball flows into a specific area (for example, the second specific area, the third specific area, or the fourth specific area), a high probability state is generated as a game state after the special game state ends. Yes.

In this case, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a result of a predetermined game (special-figure display game) becomes a special result, a specific area ( A determination means (determination device) that determines a probability state in which a game result after the special gaming state is a special result based on whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the second specific region, the third specific region, or the fourth specific region) 80), and the determining means can guide the game ball to any one of the specific area (second specific area, third specific area) and a non-specific area (first specific area) different from the specific area A first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) and a second movable member (vertical movable member 85) capable of guiding a game ball to a specific area (fourth specific area) are provided. Then, during the guidance of the game ball to the non-specific area by the first movable member (horizontal movable member 82), the movable member that guides the game ball is changed from the first movable member to the second movable member (fourth specific area). Therefore, when the game ball flows into the guide portion 82b1 of the horizontal movable member 82, the player can determine whether or not the game ball is lifted by the vertical movable member 85 to be in a certain change state. That is, it can be enjoyed whether it flows into the first specific area or the fourth specific area.
That is, in this case, the determination device 80 functions not as a round lottery for determining the number of rounds per jackpot but as a probability state lottery for determining a probability state after a big hit.
Therefore, the player flows the game ball into the specific area (first specific area) corresponding to the first special gaming state among the specific areas corresponding to the first movable member, or corresponds to the second movable member. It can be enjoyed whether it flows into a specific area (4th specific area).

  In the example shown in FIG. 100, a flow path device having an inflow port 23a that opens to the left (left game area) is provided as the flow path device 23. However, the flow path device 23 opens to the right (right game area). A flow path device having an inflow port 23a may be provided, or a flow path device having an inflow port 23a opened to the left (left game area) and an inflow port 23a opened to the right (right game area). You may make it provide both with the flow-path apparatus which has this.

According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game is performed when the game ball flows into the specific area (the first specific area to the fourth specific area) in the variable prize apparatus 35 provided with the variable prize apparatus 35. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a game value to a player, the variable prize winning device 35 has a movable member (V movable member 77) capable of guiding a game ball to a specific area and an inflow to the specific area. A discharge area (a back surface discharge flow path formed by the back surface discharge flow path forming member 63c and a discharge flow path in the variable winning device 35) in which the missed game ball flows down, and the movable member moves the game ball to a specific area. Discharge that guides the game ball to the discharge area before the start of the operation in the specific area guide operation mode for guiding (reciprocating movement between the left normal operation position and the determination device guide position; see FIG. 32B). Operation in area guidance operation mode (discharge) Movement to road induced position. Performs FIG 32 (a) see).
In the conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the gaming ball remains in the variable winning device due to injustice or trouble, and the gaming ball may win a specific area in an unintended state, but in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, Since the movable member performs the operation in the discharge region guiding operation mode before the operation in the specific region guiding operation mode is started, the movable member remains on the movable member before guiding the game ball to the specific region. The game balls that have been played can flow down to the discharge area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball from winning in a specific area due to fraud or trouble, so that fairness and fairness can be maintained.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball guided by the movable member during the operation of the movable member (V movable member 77) in the discharge region guiding operation mode is also the movable member. During the operation in the specific area guiding operation mode, the game balls that have missed the inflow of the specific area (the first specific area to the fourth specific area) are also discharged into the discharge area (the back discharge flow path forming member 63c). It is possible to configure to flow down to the road.
By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to share the discharge area.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the predetermined member (the drum accessory 62) disposed in front of the movable member (V movable member 77), and the rear of the predetermined member, A discharge region forming member (back surface discharge flow path forming member 63c) that forms a discharge region, and the discharge region forming member has a protruding portion (protruding piece 63c1) protruding toward the predetermined member side, and discharging the movable member During operation in the area guiding operation mode, the game ball guided by the movable member can be configured to move along the predetermined member and the protruding portion and flow down to the discharge area.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably flow down the game ball remaining on the movable member to the discharge flow path.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the variable winning device 35 is provided, and a game ball flows into a specific area (first specific area to fourth specific area) in the variable winning apparatus 35. In the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a game value to a player, the variable winning device 25 includes a ball channel forming member 47 that forms a ball channel through which a game ball can flow down, Has a bent portion, and a portion corresponding to the bent portion of the spherical flow path forming member 47 is provided with restricting portions (first gap portion 47a3, second gap portion 47b3) that restrict the entry of the unauthorized member. (See FIG. 8).
In a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that a gaming ball will win a specific area in an unintended state due to injustice or trouble, but in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bent portion of the ball channel forming member 47 Since the restricting portion for restricting the entry of the unauthorized member is provided in the portion corresponding to the above, it is possible to effectively suppress the unauthorized act using the unauthorized member such as a thread. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball from winning in a specific area due to fraud or trouble, so that fairness and fairness can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the ball flow path forming member 47 includes the first member (front surface portion 47a1, left surface portion 47b1) and the second member (rear surface portion 47a2, right surface portion 47b2). The restricting portions (the first gap portion 47a3 and the second gap portion 47b3) can be constituted by a gap provided between the first member and the second member.
By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to suppress effectively the illegal act using unauthorized members, such as a thread | yarn, reliably with a simple structure.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the variable winning device 35 is provided with a discharge port through which game balls are discharged, and the game port has a variable winning device 35 using a fraudulent member at the discharge port. A re-entry restricting portion (protective member 65a, specifically, a plurality of protrusions 65a1) that restricts re-entry into the can be configured (see FIG. 26).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as causing a game ball to flow backward using a fraudulent member such as a thread and reentering the variable winning device 35.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the variable winning device 35 is provided, and a game ball flows into a specific area (first specific area to fourth specific area) in the variable winning apparatus 35. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value, any one of a plurality of types of special gaming states is selected based on a specific region into which a game ball flows in a plurality of specific regions. Determining means (determining device 80), and the determining means includes a first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) and a second movable member (vertical movable member 85) capable of guiding the game ball to different specific areas. The movable member that guides the game ball may be changed from the first movable member to the second movable member during the guidance of the game ball to the specific area by the first movable member (FIG. 28). reference). Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball flows into the first V prize guiding portion 82b1 of the horizontal movable member 82, the game ball flows into the first specific area (V prize). “Per 5R” or “16R big hit” occurs. However, even when the game ball flows into the first V winning guiding portion 82b1, the timing at which the first V winning guiding portion 82b1 arrives at the 12 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82 and the magnet arrangement of the vertical movable member 85 When the timing at which any of the locations arrives at the 6 o'clock position on the vertical movable member 85 substantially matches, the game ball is lifted by the vertical movable member 85 to contact the magnet placement location. Then, when the game ball flows into the fourth specific area 86a as a result of being lifted by the vertical movable member 85, the game ball flows into the fourth specific area (V winning), and thus “16R big hit” occurs.
In the conventional gaming machine, when the special gaming state that occurs is a special gaming state that is the most disadvantageous for the player among a plurality of special gaming states, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced, but this embodiment In the gaming machine 1, the movable member that guides the game ball may be changed from the first movable member to the second movable member in the middle of guiding the game ball to the specific area by the first movable member. The player can enjoy whether or not the movable member for guiding the game ball is changed during the guidance of the game ball by the first movable member. That is, since it is possible to entertain whether the game ball flows into the specific area corresponding to the first movable member or the specific area corresponding to the second movable member, Even in the special gaming state that is the most disadvantageous for the player in the special gaming state, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the plurality of types of special game states are more advantageous to the player than the first special game state ("per 5R") and the first special game state. And the first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) includes a specific area (first specific area) corresponding to the first special game state among a plurality of specific areas. ) And the second movable member (vertical movable member 85) can be guided to the specific area (third specific area) corresponding to the second special game state. Among the plurality of specific areas, the game ball can be guided to a specific area (fourth specific area) corresponding to the second special game state, and the specific area corresponding to the first special game state by the first movable member A moving part that guides the game ball in the middle of the guidance of the game ball There may be configured such that it may be changed from the first movable member to the second movable member.
By configuring in this way, the movable member that guides the game ball to the specific area corresponding to the first special game state by the first movable member is moved from the first movable member to the second movable member. Since it may be changed to a member, the game ball flows into the specific area (first specific area) corresponding to the first special game state among the specific areas corresponding to the first movable member, or the second movable It can be enjoyed whether it flows into the specific area (4th specific area) corresponding to a member, and it becomes possible to raise the interest of a game.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) moves the game ball to the first movable member in the middle of guiding the game ball to the specific area. And the second movable member (vertical movable member 85) can be guided to a predetermined position (in the case of this embodiment, the 12 o'clock position on the horizontal movable member 82) where the game can be made at the predetermined position. The movable member for guiding the sphere is changed from the first movable member to the second movable member, and the operation direction of the first movable member and the operation direction of the second movable member at the predetermined position are the same (in this embodiment, the right Direction).
With such a configuration, the operation direction of the first movable member and the operation direction of the second movable member at a position (predetermined position) where the movable member that guides the game ball is changed from the first movable member to the second movable member. Therefore, when the movable member for guiding the game ball is changed from the first movable member to the second movable member, the change can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to generate a special game state that gives a player a game value when a result of a predetermined game (special figure change display game) is a special result. In a special gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a specific area (the second specific area, the third specific area, the fourth specific area) in the special game state, and based on the determination result, after the special game state A determination unit (determination device 80) that determines a probability state in which a game result is a special result is provided. The determination unit includes a specific region (second specific region, third specific region) and a non-specific region different from the specific region. A first movable member (horizontal movable member 82) capable of guiding the game ball to any one of the (first specific region) and a second movable member capable of guiding the game ball to the specific region (fourth specific region) (Vertical movable member 85) In the course of guiding the game ball to the non-specific area by the first movable member (horizontal movable member 82), the movable member that guides the game ball may be changed from the first movable member to the second movable member. Such a configuration is also possible (see FIG. 100).
In the conventional gaming machine, if the game ball does not win in the specific area, there is a risk that the interest of the game may be reduced, but in the gaming machine 1 of the modification shown in FIG. 100, the non-specification by the first movable member Since the movable member that guides the game ball may be changed from the first movable member to the second movable member in the middle of guiding the game ball to the region, the player can change the non-specific region by the first movable member. It is possible to enjoy whether or not the movable member that guides the game ball is changed during the guidance of the game ball to. That is, since it is possible to entertain whether the game ball flows into the non-specific area or the specific area, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game even if the game ball does not win the specific area.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when a result of a predetermined game is a special result (a game ball flowing down the game area 32 as a result of a game ball flowing down the game area 32, the game ball is in a specific area. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when the game ball flows into a specific area (first specific area to fourth specific area), and stores the game ball A movable member (V movable member 77) capable of guiding the stored game ball to the specific area and a discharge area (rear surface discharge flow path formation) where the game ball that has missed the inflow to the specific area flows down A back discharge passage formed by the member 63c and a discharge passage in the variable prize winning device 35), and a state advantageous to the player (special game state) can be generated when the game ball flows into the specific area. Yes, the movable member is stored Before starting the operation in the specific area guiding operation mode for guiding the game ball to the specific area (movement between the left normal operation position and the determining device guidance position), the stored game ball is moved to the discharge area. The operation in the discharge region guiding operation mode to be guided (moving to the discharge flow path guiding position) is performed, and the operation range is different between the operation in the specific region guiding operation mode and the operation in the discharge region guiding operation mode.
In a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that a big hit state (special game state) may be illegally generated due to an illegal act of storing a game ball in a movable member by hand in advance. In the machine, since the movable member performs the operation in the discharge region guiding operation mode before the operation in the specific region guiding operation mode is started, the movable member is movable before guiding the game ball to the specific region. The game ball remaining on the member can flow down to the discharge channel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a special gaming state due to an illegal act of storing the game ball in the movable member by hand in advance.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 is not limited to a two-type pachinko machine, and may be a single-type pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a one-type pachinko machine, a case where the special map change display game stop result is a special result corresponds to a case where a predetermined game result is a special result, and a high probability state ( (Probable change state) corresponds to “a state advantageous to the player”.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the operation in the discharge area guiding operation mode can be configured to have a wider operating range than the operation in the specific area guiding operation mode.
By comprising in this way, the game ball which remained in the movable member can be reliably flowed down to the discharge channel.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the movable member (V movable member 77) has reached a position (discharge flow path guiding position) that can be reached only during operation in the discharge area guiding operation mode. In this case, the game ball stored in the movable member can be configured to flow down to the discharge area.
By comprising in this way, the game ball which remained in the movable member can be reliably flowed down to the discharge channel.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when a result of a predetermined game is a special result (a game ball flowing down the game area 32 as a result of a game ball flowing down the game area 32, the game ball is in a specific area. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value in the case of an inflow into a specific area (a first specific area to a fourth specific area) and a game ball are specified A movable member (V movable member 77) that can be guided to an area, and when a game ball flows into the specific area, a state advantageous to the player (special game state) can be generated. At the end of the operation in the specific area guidance operation mode that guides the game ball to the specific area (movement between the left normal operation position and the determination device guidance position), a return operation is performed to return to the initial position, and the return operation In the case of Regardless of the direction, the time required for return to the initial position is operated in a direction in which the shortest (see Figure 98 and Figure 99).
Therefore, since the movable member operates in the direction in which the time required to return to the initial position becomes the shortest in the return operation regardless of the operation direction immediately before the start of the return operation, the return time of the movable member to the initial position Can be shortened.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 is not limited to a two-type pachinko machine, and may be a single-type pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a one-type pachinko machine, a case where the special map change display game stop result is a special result corresponds to a case where a predetermined game result is a special result, and a high probability state ( (Probable change state) corresponds to “a state advantageous to the player”.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the movable member (V movable member 77) has an operation direction immediately before the start of the return operation and a direction in which the time required to return to the initial position is the shortest. However, in the reverse direction, it is possible to configure so as to start the return operation after stopping for a predetermined time (see FIGS. 98 (b) and 99 (a)).
By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to suppress damage or deterioration of the drive mechanism of the movable member (including the V movable accessory motor 73).

In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when a result of a predetermined game is a special result (a game ball flowing down the game area 32 as a result of a game ball flowing down the game area 32, the game ball is in a specific area. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value in the case of an inflow), a plurality of identification symbols are variably displayed and then selected from a plurality of stop symbols (stop symbol patterns) The number of rounds for determining the number of round games (number of rounds) in the special gaming state based on the display device (the special figure 1 display D1, the special figure 2 display D2) for displaying the stop symbol and the selected stop symbol Determining means (game control device 100), round lottery effect executing means (effect control device 300) for executing a round lottery effect for apparently drawing the number of round games in the special game state, On the basis of the stop symbols, demonstration execution determining means for determining whether to execute the round drawing effect and (game controller 100), and a (see FIG. 96).
The number of round games is determined in advance, and the round lottery production is only a production, but basically the probability of becoming a good result (a big hit with many round games) is often set low, If a round lottery effect is executed each time a game ball flows into a specific area vaguely as in a conventional gaming machine, it may give the player an impression that no matter how much the lottery can be drawn. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the reliability of the round lottery effect may be lowered, but in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the round lottery effect is executed based on the selected stop symbol. Since it is determined whether or not to do so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the reliability of the round lottery effect, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 is not limited to a two-type pachinko machine, and may be a single-type pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a one-type pachinko machine, a case where the special map change display game stop result is a special result corresponds to a case where a predetermined game result is a special result, and a high probability state ( (Probable change state) corresponds to “a state advantageous to the player”.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the plurality of stop symbols (stop symbol patterns) are the first stop symbol (stop symbol patterns 2 and 3) and the second stop symbol (stop symbol pattern 1). The round number determining means (game control device 100) includes the same number of round games (number of rounds) in the case where the selected stop symbol is the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. When the selected stop symbol is the first stop symbol, the effect execution determining means (game control device 100) determines to execute the round lottery effect, and the selected stop symbol is the second stop. In the case of a symbol, it can be configured to determine not to execute the round lottery effect (see FIG. 96).
By configuring in this way, even when the number of round games is the same, there are cases where the round lottery effect is executed and cases where the round lottery effect is not executed. Can be increased.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when a result of a predetermined game is a special result (a game ball flowing down the game area 32 as a result of a game ball flowing down the game area 32, the game ball is in a specific area. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a flow is entered into the game), after a plurality of identification symbols are variably displayed, a stop symbol selected from the plurality of stop symbols is displayed. Display device (Special Figure 1 Display D1, Special Figure 2 Display D2), Open pattern determining means (Game control device 100) for determining the open pattern of the special winning opening based on the selected stop symbol, and selection Round number determination means (game control device 100) for determining the number of round games (number of rounds) in the special gaming state based on the stopped symbols made, the plurality of stop symbols of the open pattern A plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to one release pattern (Special Figure 1 stop symbol patterns 1 to 3), and a plurality of release patterns corresponding to a second release pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first release pattern. The second stop symbols (Special Figure 2 stop symbol patterns 1 to 3), and the plurality of first stop symbols are the first stops corresponding to the first number of round games (5R, 8R). The first stop symbol (the special figure 1 stop) corresponding to the symbol (the special figure 1 stop symbol patterns 1 and 2) and the second number (16R) that is more advantageous to the player than the first number of round games. The plurality of second stop symbols include a second stop symbol corresponding to the first number of times (special symbol 2 stop symbol patterns 1 and 2) and a second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times. (Special Figure 2 Stop Pattern 3) The ratio of the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times from among the first stop symbols (10% in the example shown in FIG. 96) and the second number of times among the plurality of second stop symbols The ratio at which the second stop symbol is selected (20% in the example shown in FIG. 96) is different.
Accordingly, the ratio of selecting the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times from among the plurality of first stop symbols and the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times from among the plurality of second stop symbols are selected. The number of rounds that are advantageous for the player is different between the case where the opening pattern of the big prize opening is disadvantageous for the player and the case where the opening pattern of the big winning opening is advantageous for the player. Since the rates are different, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 is not limited to a two-type pachinko machine, and may be a single-type pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a one-type pachinko machine, a case where the special map change display game stop result is a special result corresponds to a case where a predetermined game result is a special result, and a high probability state ( (Probable change state) corresponds to “a state advantageous to the player”.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first stop symbol (16R) corresponding to the second number of times (16R) from among the plurality of first stop symbols (Special Figure 1 stop symbol patterns 1 to 3). The second number of the second stop symbols (special symbol 2 stop symbol patterns 1 to 3) is selected more than the ratio (10% in the example shown in FIG. 96) where the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern 3) is selected. It is possible to configure such that the ratio (20% in the example shown in FIG. 96) at which the corresponding second stop symbol (special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern 3) is selected is higher.
By configuring in this way, the number of rounds advantageous to the player is generated when the opening pattern of the big prize opening is advantageous to the player than when the opening pattern of the big winning opening is disadvantageous to the player. Since the rate becomes high, it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when a result of a predetermined game is a special result (a game ball flowing down the game area 32 as a result of a game ball flowing down the game area 32, the game ball is in a specific area. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value in the case of an inflow), a plurality of identification symbols are variably displayed and then selected from a plurality of stop symbols (stop symbol patterns) A display device for displaying a stop symbol (special display 1 display D1, special graph 2 display D2) and an open pattern determination means (game control device) for determining an open pattern for a special winning opening based on the selected stop symbol 100) and round number determination means (game control device 100) for determining the number of round games (number of rounds) in the special gaming state based on the selected stop symbol, A number of first stop symbols (Special Figure 1 stop symbol patterns 1 to 3) and a plurality of second stop symbols (Special Figure 2 stop symbol patterns 1 to 3), wherein the plurality of first stop symbols are round The first stop symbol (Special Figure 1 stop symbol pattern 1, 2) corresponding to the first number (5R, 8R) of the number of games and the player's advantage over the first number of round games A second stop symbol corresponding to the first number of times (special Fig. 1 stop symbol pattern 3, 4), and a plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times (16R). 2 includes a stop symbol pattern 1, 2) and a second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times (Special Figure 2 stop symbol pattern 3). The first stop symbol corresponding to the first number of times (Special Figure 1 stop) The symbol patterns 1 and 2) are the same as the first opening pattern (opening once) of the opening patterns. However, the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is more advantageous for the player than the symbol corresponding to the first release pattern (Special Figure 1 stop symbol pattern 3) and the first release pattern of the release patterns. And a second stop pattern corresponding to the first number of times (special figure 2 stop symbol pattern 1 and 2) and The second stop symbol corresponding to 2 times (Special Fig. 2 Stop symbol pattern 3) corresponds to the second release pattern (2 times open), and the first corresponding to the second number of times among the plurality of first stop symbols. The ratio at which the stop symbol is selected is the same as the ratio at which the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of second stop symbols (10% in the example shown in FIG. 97).
Therefore, the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times includes a symbol corresponding to the first release pattern and a symbol corresponding to the second release pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first release pattern, The second stop symbol corresponding to the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times corresponds to the second release pattern, and the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of first stop symbols. And the ratio at which the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of second stop symbols are the same, so that the second release pattern (that is, the game ball becomes a big winning opening) Incidence rate of easy-to-win open patterns) increases. Therefore, since the occurrence rate of the number of rounds advantageous to the player can be increased, the interest of the game can be increased.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 is not limited to a two-type pachinko machine, and may be a single-type pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a one-type pachinko machine, a case where the special map change display game stop result is a special result corresponds to a case where a predetermined game result is a special result, and a high probability state ( (Probable change state) corresponds to “a state advantageous to the player”.

FIG. 101 is a rear view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 103 is a perspective view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIGS. 101-103, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a game control device (not shown), an accessory device 51, an effect control device 300, a container 1400, and a first relay board. 1500, a second relay board 1600, a first mounting part 1700, a second mounting part 1800, a third mounting part 1900, and a third relay board 1000.
In addition, the structure demonstrated here is applicable also to the other control apparatus and apparatus provided in the pachinko machine 1 or the game board 30. FIG. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to peripheral devices of the pachinko machine 1 such as a ball lending machine.

The game control device includes a game control board and a connector.
The connector is a plurality of members provided on the game control board, connected to a harness, and connected to another device or the like.

The accessory device 51 includes, on the back side thereof, a back side constituent member 1201, a first engagement hole 1202, and a second engagement hole 1203, on both the front side and the back side of the game board 30. It is a device that is exposed, and is attached to the game board 30 so that a rotating body that looks like a drum as a surface constituent member is exposed on the front surface side, and a back surface constituent member 1201 is exposed on the back surface side.
The back surface component 1201 is a member that configures the back surface of the accessory device 51, and the first mounting portion 1700 is provided on the rear exposed surface.
The first attachment portion 1700 is formed with a first engagement hole 1202 and a second engagement hole 1203.
The first engagement hole 1202 is a rectangular hole provided on the lower left side of the back surface component 1201, and a first engagement piece 1401 described later is engaged with this hole.
The second engagement hole 1203 is a rectangular hole provided on the lower right side of the back surface component 1201, and a second engagement piece 1402 described later is engaged with this hole.

  The effect control device 300 is a rectangular parallelepiped device having a plurality of connectors (not shown) and is attached adjacent to the right side of the accessory device 51. In addition, the effect control device 300 is attached in an oblique direction without being parallel to the back surface due to the size of the game board 30, that is, the limitation of the front view space on the back surface.

FIG. 105 is a rear view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 106 is a perspective view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the first relay board 1500 is provided on the lower right side of the back surface of the game board 30, and includes a rectangular flat board 1501 and a plurality of connectors 1502 provided on the board 1501. I have.
In addition, the first relay board 1500 is provided adjacent to the right side of the second mounting portion, which will be described later, and the connector 1502 is connected to the connector 1001 via a harness.
The first relay substrate 1500 is covered with the exposed portion on the back side by a coating member (not shown) after the wiring connection operation is performed.

The second relay board 1600 is provided in the upper center of the back surface of the game board 30 and includes a rectangular flat board 1601 and a plurality of connectors 1602 provided on the board 1601.
The second relay board 1600 is provided with the board 1601 adjacent to the left side of the effect control device 300.
The second relay substrate 1600 is covered with the exposed portion on the back side by the covering member 1603 after the wiring connection operation is performed.

FIG. 104 is a perspective view showing a third relay board and a container according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 104, the container 1400 includes a flat portion 1403, a surrounding wall 1404, a first engagement piece 1401, and a second engagement piece 1402.
The flat portion 1403 is a member that is spaced apart from and opposed to the third relay substrate 1000 when the third relay substrate 1000 is accommodated, and has a planar shape that is substantially the same as that of the third relay substrate 1000. Yes.
Further, the flat portion 1403 is formed with screw holes 1403a for attaching and fixing the third relay board 1000 in the vicinity of the four corners of the rectangular flat surface, and a long hole 1403b extending in parallel with the long side is formed at the center.
The surrounding wall 1404 is a member that rises perpendicularly from the peripheral edge of the flat portion 1403 to the flat portion 1403, and the surrounding wall 1404 and the flat portion 1403 form a space in which the third relay substrate 1000 is accommodated. Further, the surrounding wall 1404 is provided with a notch 1404a on the upper side of the flat surface portion 1403, and a space between the flat surface portion 1403 and the third relay substrate 1000 is communicated with the outside.

  The first engagement piece 1401 and the second engagement piece 1402 are provided on both sides of the short side of the rectangular plane, and are engagement pieces that serve as fixed portions when attached to a first attachment portion 1700 and a second attachment portion 1800 described later. It is. Specifically, one engagement piece is a claw-shaped first engagement piece 1401 having an L-shaped cross section that protrudes outward from the short side, and the other engagement piece protrudes outward from the short side. It is the 2nd engagement piece 1402 which has elasticity along the long-side side of the cross-sectional U character to do. Further, the first engagement piece 1401 and the second engagement piece 1402 protrude toward the opposite side of the surrounding wall 1404 with respect to the flat portion 1403.

The first engagement piece 1401 is accommodated in the space of the first engagement hole 1202, and engages with the back surface constituent member 1201 on the left side of the first engagement hole 1202.
Further, the second engagement piece 1402 is provided with an engagement protrusion 1402a that protrudes outward from the short side of the flat surface portion 1403. The engagement protrusion 1402a is adapted to engage with the right side of the second engagement hole 1203.
Specifically, the first engagement piece 1401 is first engaged with the first engagement hole 1202, and then the second engagement piece 1402 is engaged with the second engagement hole 1203, so that the container 1400 is an accessory. It will be attached to the back side of the device 51.

When the second engagement piece 1402 is engaged with the second engagement hole 1203, the second engagement piece 1402 having a U-shaped cross section is elastically deformed to be fitted into the second engagement hole 1203. The engagement protrusion 1402a is engaged with the right side of the second engagement hole 1203 by returning to the original shape by the restoring force. At this time, the second engagement piece 1402 is not completely restored by the restoring force, and the restoring force remains, and the remaining restoring force is generated between the engagement protrusion 1402a and the second engagement hole 1203. The engaged state is stabilized.
In addition, the container 1400 elastically deforms the second engagement piece 1402 to release the engagement of the engagement protrusion 1402a, and the second engagement piece 1402 is detached from the second engagement hole 1203. Since the engagement state of the engagement piece 1401 with the first engagement hole 1202 is eliminated, the engagement piece 1401 can be detached from a first attachment portion 1700 described later.

FIG. 107 is a side view showing the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108 is a side view showing the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, in the first mounting portion 1700, the first engagement hole 1202 and the second engagement hole 1203 are engaged with the first engagement piece 1401 and the second engagement piece 1402, respectively. Thus, the container 1400 is attached to the accessory device 51. Further, the first attachment portion 1700 is a portion that protrudes most rearward on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second mounting portion 1800 is provided adjacent to the left side of the first relay board 1500, and includes a flat portion 1801, a third engagement hole 1802, and a fourth engagement hole. 1803.
The flat surface portion 1801 has a flat surface that is substantially the same shape as the flat surface portion 1403 of the container 1400, and is a portion that contacts the flat surface portion 1403 when the container 1400 is attached.
In addition, the flat portion 1801 is formed with a long hole extending in the long side direction substantially at the center of the flat surface, and includes a projecting portion 1801a that protrudes vertically rearward with respect to the flat portion 1801 along the periphery of the long hole. ing. The protruding portion 1801a is provided at a position corresponding to the long hole 1403b, and is fitted into the long hole 1403b when the container 1400 is attached to the second attachment portion 1800. That is, the projecting portion 1801a performs a positioning function between the container 1400 and the second mounting portion 1800.

In addition, the second mounting portion 1800 is located at a relatively deep location on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the second attachment portion 1800 is recessed so that the first attachment portion 1700 protrudes backward from the rearmost portion of the third relay substrate 1000 in a state where the third relay substrate 1000 is attached. Yes.
The third relay substrate 1000 is connected to the second attachment portion 1800 after wiring connection work is performed, and then the exposed portion on the back surface side is covered with the covering member 1804.

  In addition, the long hole 1801b surrounded by the protrusion 1801a is an opening that connects the space inside the pachinko machine 1 and the external space from the plane part 1801, and the heated inside air inside the pachinko machine 1 is discharged from the opening to the outside air. It functions as an exhaust port (heat exhaust port) that exhausts air to the outside. Specifically, in a state in which the container 1400 is attached to the second attachment portion 1800, the elongated hole 1403b is fitted with the protrusion 1801a, and the tip of the protrusion 1801a is separated from the third relay substrate 1000. It has become. For this reason, the exhaust is exhausted from the notch 1404a provided in the upper part of the surrounding wall 1404 through the space between the flat part 1403 and the third relay substrate 1000 from the projecting part 1801a.

The third engagement hole 1802 is provided on the left short side of the flat portion 1801, and a space for accommodating the first engagement piece 1401 is provided at the third engagement hole 1802. The accommodated first engagement piece 1401 is engaged with the left side portion of the third engagement hole 1802.
The fourth engagement hole 1803 is provided on the right short side of the flat portion 1801, and a space for accommodating the second engagement piece 1402 is provided at the location of the fourth engagement hole 1803.

Further, when the second engagement piece 1402 is engaged with the fourth engagement hole 1803, the second engagement piece 1402 having a U-shaped cross section is elastically deformed to be fitted into the fourth engagement hole 1803. The engagement protrusion 1402a is engaged with the right side of the fourth engagement hole 1803 by a restoring force.
In addition, the container 1400 elastically deforms the second engagement piece 1402 to release the engagement of the engagement protrusion 1402a, and the second engagement piece 1402 is detached from the fourth engagement hole 1803. The engagement piece 1401 is removed from the second attachment portion 1800 when the engagement state with the third engagement hole 1802 is canceled.

That is, the container 1400 can be attached to each of the first attachment portion 1700 and the second attachment portion 1800, and is suitably convenient during the manufacturing operation of the pachinko machine 1 and the operation of the pachinko machine 1. It can be attached to the place.
Specifically, the container 1400 is connected to the connector 1001 of the third relay board 1000 and the connector 1502 of the first relay board 1500 in a state where the third relay board 1000 is attached. It is attached to the first attachment portion 1700, and is attached to the second attachment portion 1800 when the connection operation is completed and the pachinko machine 1 is used.

In other words, in the connection work, the third relay board 1000 is not attached adjacent to the first relay board 1500, is located in the approximate center of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, and is the most protruding first. It can be attached to one attachment portion 1700.
Therefore, when connecting the connector 1001 of the third relay board 1000 and the connector 1502 of the first relay board 1500 with a harness, the connectors 1001 and 1502 are not close to each other and the connection work is not complicated. Since it is not necessary to perform the connection work in the recessed part like 2 attachment part 1800, work becomes easy.
Moreover, since the 1st attachment part 1700 is the location which protruded most on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, it is much easier to attach a harness to the connector 1001 of the third relay board 1000.

FIG. 109 is a rear view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIGS. 109 to 110, the third attachment portion 1900 is a place where the effect control device 300 is attached, and the flat portion 1901, the insertion hole 1902, and the engagement groove 1903 are collectively referred to as a third attachment. Part 1900.
The plane portion 1901 is a member having a plane with which the effect control device 300 abuts when the effect control device 300 is attached, and is fixed on the back side of the game board 30 as shown in FIG.
The insertion hole 1902 is a member provided at the upper part of the plane portion 1901 and is a member for fixing the upper part of the production control device 300. The insertion hole 1902 is a long hole extending in the horizontal direction, specifically a hole formed in a bowl shape. is there.
The engagement groove 1903 is provided below the flat portion 1901 and is a member for fixing the lower portion of the effect control device 300. Like the long hole of the insertion hole 1902, the groove extends in the horizontal direction. The left side of the end portion of the groove is not provided with a wall surface and a gap is formed. Further, a locking portion 1903a is provided at a position separated from the gap. Also, as shown in FIG. 112, the game board 30 is fixed on the back side.
The protective pillar 1904 is a part of the base member of the control base unit 39, but may be provided as a single member instead of a part of the base member.

FIG. 111 is a rear view showing the effect control board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 111, the effect control device 300 includes an insertion hole 301, a fastening part 302, a volume adjustment part 303, and an identification display part 304.
The insertion hole 301 is a semi-elliptical member protruding upward from a rectangular plane in front view at the top of the effect control device 300, and a circular hole is formed at the top.
The fastening portion 302 is a member that protrudes downward from the lower portion of the effect control device 300, and is formed in a rectangular shape in front view.

The volume adjustment unit 303 is provided on the lower left side of the effect control device 300 and is a member that adjusts the volume of the effect sound when playing the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the volume can be adjusted in all 10 levels from the minimum (0 level) to the maximum (9 levels), and the minimum level is set to mute.
The identification display unit 304 is an identification display for identifying an individual provided on the back side of the effect control device 300 (the same side as the back side of the pachinko machine 1). As this identification display, for example, a sheet-like sticker may be affixed or stamped, or characters may be displayed in a convex shape by pressing.

FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIGS. 110 and 112, the specific mode in which the production control device 300 is attached to the third attachment portion 1900 is first abutted in a state where the production control device 300 is slightly shifted to the left with respect to the plane portion 1901. The insertion hole 301 provided in the upper part of the production control device 300 corresponds to the long hole insertion hole 1902 provided in the upper part of the plane portion 1901 and the hole space, and the insertion hole 301 is inserted into these two holes. Insert pin A to the middle and temporarily fix it.
The insertion pin A has a large diameter portion having elasticity, not shown, formed at a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion hole 301 and the distance between the upper side and the lower side of the insertion hole 1902 at the tip and middle. . Here, the above-mentioned “insertion to the middle” means a state in which the insertion holes 301 and 1902 are both disposed in a portion sandwiched between these two large diameter portions.
Further, the separation distance between the large diameter portions is larger than the thickness dimension of the two insertion holes 301 and 1902. In other words, in a state where it is inserted to the middle, the position of the insertion hole 301 can freely slide in the extending direction of the insertion hole 1902 which is a long hole.

Then, by sliding the production control device 300 diagonally right forward along the flat surface portion 1901, the fastening portion 302 provided in the lower portion engages from the left gap of the engagement groove 1903 to the right along the groove. It is accommodated in the engaging groove 1903 while mating. At this time, the temporarily inserted insertion pin A slides to the right along the extending direction of the elongated insertion hole 1902.
Finally, with the effect control device 300 temporarily fixed at a predetermined position, the upper insertion pin A is completely inserted into the two insertion holes 301 and 1902 and fixed. Here, “completely inserted through” means that the insertion hole 301 and the insertion hole 1902 are arranged between the large-diameter portion provided in the middle and the pin head of the insertion pin A. Further, the separation dimension between the large diameter part of the middle abdomen and the pin head is substantially the same as the thickness dimension including the insertion hole 301 and the insertion hole 1902. That is, when the insertion hole 301 is completely inserted, the position of the insertion hole 301 cannot be freely slid in the horizontal direction of the elongated insertion hole 1902 and is fixedly positioned.
As for the engagement state between the engagement groove 1903 and the fastening portion 302, even if the insertion pin A is loosened and the insertion hole 301 is displaced along the insertion hole 1902, the engagement groove 1903 has a gap. Since the locking portion 1903a is provided at a separated position, the locking portion 302 is locked by the locking portion 1903a in advance even when the locking portion 302 is detached from the locking groove 1903, so that the locking portion 1903a is engaged. It does not leave the groove 1903.

FIG. 113 is a rear view showing the back surface of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 113, the protection column 1904 is a columnar member provided outwardly from the plane portion 1901, and the effect control device 300 is attached between the protection column 1904 and the plane portion 1901. It has become.
For this reason, for example, when an object collides from the outside of the production control device 300, the protective column 1904 is provided outside the production control device 300. Therefore, the object collides with the protection column 1904, and the production control is performed. There is no direct collision with the device 300.

Further, the protection pillar 1904 is provided with an opening 1904a at a location corresponding to the identification display unit 304 when the production control device 300 is attached.
For this reason, the identification content of the identification display unit 304 can be seen through the opening 1904a.
Further, the protective column 1904 has a width dimension smaller than that of the identification display unit 304, so that a space can be secured around the protective column 1904, and not only from the opening 1904 a but also from the periphery of the protective column 1904. Also, the identification display unit 304 can be visually observed.

  A ball restricting member 1905 is provided above the effect control device 300. The ball restricting member 1905 is a member that restricts the destination of the ball so that the game ball falling from above does not hit the effect control device 300 directly. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island-type game hall, game balls supplied to the pachinko machine 1 are stored in the upper part of the pachinko machine 1. When the stored game balls are supplied (when the game balls flow into the storage location), the game balls may occasionally spill out of the storage location. It will fall to. For this reason, the ball control member 1905 is provided between the production control device 300 and the storage location, thereby preventing the game ball from directly hitting the production control device 300.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the following operational effects can be achieved.
In the present embodiment, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the pachinko machine 1 that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the harness is connected. For example, the third relay board 1000 including a connector, a first attachment part 1700 that is an attachment part to which one third relay board 1000 can be attached, and a second attachment part 1800 are provided.
By doing so, when the third relay board 1000 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, it can be attached to either the first attachment part 1700 or the second attachment part 1800, and the wiring connection work can be easily performed. .

  In the present embodiment, the third relay board 1000 includes a connector 1001 for connecting a harness, and the first attachment portion 1700 is an attachment portion to which the third relay board 1000 is attached when the harness is connected. The second attachment portion 1800 is an attachment portion to which the third relay board 1000 is attached when the pachinko machine 1 is used.

By doing so, the third relay board 1000 is attached to the first attachment portion 1700 when the harness is connected, and is attached to the second attachment portion 1800 when the pachinko machine 1 is used. Work can be made easier.
Specifically, when the first relay board 1500 and the third relay board 1000 that are close to (adjacent to) the second mounting portion 1800 are connected, the first relay board 1500 and the third relay board 1000 are close to each other. Therefore, when the wiring work is performed by attaching to the second attachment portion 1800, the work space for connecting the connectors 1001, 1502 provided on the third relay board 1000 and the board 1501 with a harness is narrow, and the connection work is not easy. However, at the stage of wiring connection work, the third relay board 1000 is more distant from the first relay board 1500 by attaching the third relay board 1000 to the first mounting part 1700 instead of the second mounting part 1800. Can be made.
Therefore, the connectors 1001 and 1502 are arranged close to each other as in the case where the first relay board 1500 and the third relay board 1000 are close to each other, and it is difficult for the wiring operator's fingers to enter easily. Wiring work can be performed.
In addition, after the wiring work is completed, the gaming machine can be used with the third relay board 1000 attached to the second attachment portion 1800.

In the present embodiment, when the third relay board 1000 is attached to the first attachment portion 1700, the connectors 1001 and 1502 to which the harness is to be connected are exposed to the outside.
By doing so, when the third relay board 1000 is attached to the first attachment portion 1700, the connector 1001 is exposed to the outside, so that the harness can be easily connected and the wiring can be easily connected. can do.
In other words, the third relay board 1000 is not attached to the second attachment part 1800 adjacent to the first relay board 1500, but the third relay board 1000 is attached to the first attachment part 1700 located substantially at the center of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. A wide space for mounting and wiring connection work is secured, and the connectors 1001 and 1502 are exposed to the outside in this state, so that the work space and the connection work between the connectors 1001 and 1502 and the harness itself are easy. This can further facilitate the wiring connection work.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, A third relay board 1000 having a connector 1001 for connection, a first attachment part 1700 that is an attachment part to which the third relay board 1000 can be attached, a second attachment part 1800, and the front side of the pachinko machine 1 An effect control device 300 that is exposed and allows the player to visually recognize the effect of the game, and a back surface configuration member 1201 that constitutes at least a part of the back surface of the effect control device 300, and the first mounting portion 1700 includes a back surface The second mounting portion 1800 provided on the component member 1201 is provided at a place other than the back surface component member 1201.
Thus, when the third relay board 1000 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, it can be attached to either the first attachment part 1700 or the second attachment part 1800.

In addition, the first mounting portion 1700 is provided on the back surface constituent member 1201, and the second mounting portion 1800 is provided at a place other than the back surface constituent member 1201.
By carrying out like this, the 1st attaching part 1700 and the 2nd attaching part 1800 will be provided in another member in the back, respectively.
Therefore, the connectors 1001 and 1502 are arranged close to each other as in the case where the first relay board 1500 and the third relay board 1000 are close to each other, and it is difficult for the wiring operator's fingers to enter easily. Wiring work can be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a container 1400 that accommodates the third relay board 1000 is provided, and this container 1400 can be attached to either the first attachment part 1700 or the second attachment part 1800. It was supposed to be.
By doing so, the container 1400 can be appropriately attached to the first attachment portion 1700 or the second attachment portion 1800 according to convenience, and the wiring connection work can be facilitated.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the 1st attaching part 1700 shall be provided in the location which protruded back most on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1.
In this way, when performing the wiring work, the third relay board 1000 attached to the first attachment portion 1700 is most exposed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, and the work for connecting the harness to the connector 1001 is easy. It can be.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the 2nd attachment part 1800 shall be provided in the location which was deeply recessed in the back surface of the pachinko machine 1.
By doing so, the third relay board 1000 is attached to the second attachment portion 1800 located relatively deep from the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 after the attachment to the first attachment portion and wiring work. The wiring work can be easily performed at the protruding portion, and the third relay board 1000 can be disposed at a relatively deep position on the back surface in consideration of space saving after the work is finished.
Here, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is arranged with two adjacent rows and the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 is opposed to form a so-called island-shaped game space, the third relay board 1000 is set to the first relay board 1000. If an attempt is made to play a game while being attached to the attachment portion 1700, the distance between the third relay boards 1000 of the opposing pachinko machine 1 becomes narrow, and a sufficient interval cannot be secured.

For this reason, it is not preferable to play the game while the third relay substrate 1000 is attached to the first attachment portion 1700 that is most protruding on the back surface.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when playing a game, the first attachment portion 1700 protrudes backward from the rearmost portion of the third relay substrate 1000 in a state where the third relay substrate 1000 is attached. Since the third relay board 1000 is attached to the second attachment portion 1800 that is so deep, it is possible to secure the distance from the opposing pachinko machine 1 by the distance between the opposing first attachment portions 1700. it can.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the plane part 1801 of the 2nd attachment part 1800 shall be provided with the long hole 1801b enclosed by the protrusion part 1801a. The long hole 1801b is an opening that allows the space inside the pachinko machine 1 to communicate with the external space from the plane portion 1801.
By doing so, the long hole 1801b can function as an exhaust port (exhaust heat exhaust port) for exhausting the heated inside air inside the pachinko machine 1 to the outside air, and the temperature inside the pachinko machine 1 is raised by heat storage. Can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the production control device 300 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 at an angle with respect to the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, that is, obliquely attached to the game board 30.
By doing so, the exclusive area in plan view of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the effect control device 300 is provided parallel to the back surface.
For this reason, when the accessory device 51 is a relatively large device, it is not necessary to enlarge the game board 30 in order to attach the effect control device 300 (in practice, it is not possible to enlarge the game board 30 due to restrictions such as standards). Difficult), space saving.

In the present embodiment, when the second engagement piece 1402 is engaged with the second engagement hole 1203, the second engagement piece 1402 having a U-shaped cross section is elastically deformed to cause the second engagement hole 1402 to be elastically deformed. The engagement protrusion 1402a is engaged with the right side of the second engagement hole 1203 by being fitted to 1203 and returning to the original shape by the restoring force.
At this time, the second engagement piece 1402 was not completely restored by the restoring force, and the restoring force remained.
By doing so, the remaining restoring force can stabilize the engagement state between the engagement protrusion 1402a and the second engagement hole 1203, and the container 1400 and the first attachment portion 1700 or the second attachment portion 1800 can be stabilized. The mounting state can be stabilized.

Further, in the present embodiment, the protection column 1904 is provided to be spaced outward from the plane part 1901, and the effect control device 300 is attached between the protection column 1904 and the plane part 1901.
By doing so, for example, when an object collides from the outside of the production control device 300, the protective column 1904 is provided outside the production control device 300, so the object collides with the protection column 1904, It does not directly collide with the direct performance control device 300.

In the present embodiment, the protection pillar 1904 is provided with an opening 1904a at a location corresponding to the identification display unit 304 when the production control device 300 is attached.
By doing so, the identification contents of the identification display unit 304 can be visually observed from the opening 1904a.

In the present embodiment, the protective column 1904 has a width dimension smaller than that of the identification display unit 304.
In this way, a space can be secured around the protective column 1904, and the identification display unit 304 can be visually observed not only from the opening 1904a but also from the periphery of the protective column 1904.

In the present embodiment, the ball restricting member 1905 is provided above the effect control device 300.
In this way, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island-type game hall, the game balls supplied to the pachinko machine 1 are stored in the upper part of the pachinko machine 1, but the stored game balls are When supplied (when the game ball flows to the storage location), it rarely spills out of the storage location, and the spilled game ball falls to the effect control device 300 below. . For this reason, by providing the ball restricting member 1905 between the effect control device 300 and the storage location, it is possible to prevent a direct hit of the game ball on the effect control device 300.

As mentioned above, although this invention was concretely demonstrated based on this embodiment, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, It can change in the range which does not deviate from the summary.
In the present embodiment, the covering members 1603 and 1804 are provided on the third relay board 1000, the first relay board, and the second relay board 1600, respectively, after the wiring connection work is completed. The members 1603 and 1804 may be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 301 and the insertion hole 1902 are temporarily fixed, and then the fixing portion 302 and the engagement groove 1903 are engaged. And the engaging groove 1903 are engaged with each other, the insertion hole 301 and the insertion hole 1902 may be positioned and fixed, and the temporary fixing may be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the first engaging piece 1401 and the second engaging piece 1402 are engaged with the first engaging hole 1202 and the second engaging hole 1203, respectively, so that the container 1400 is engaged with the first mounting portion 1700. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the container 1400 can be attached to the first attachment portion 1700.
Similarly, any configuration may be used for the configuration in which the container 1400 is attached to the second mounting portion 1800.

  In the present embodiment, the production control device 300 is configured such that the upper part is fixed by the insertion holes 301 and 1902 and the insertion pin A, and the lower part is fixed by the fastening part 302 and the engagement groove 1903. For example, a housing corresponding to the production control device 300 may be provided and attached to the third attachment portion 1900 with the same configuration as the third relay board 1000.

  Further, the insertion pin A and the insertion holes 301 and 1902 may be substituted for the second engagement piece 1402 and the second engagement hole 1203 that are parts to which the third relay board 1000 is attached. By substituting it, it becomes possible to temporarily fix it, and it becomes easy to grasp the mounting position of the third relay board 1000 by temporary fixing, so that improvement in work efficiency can be expected.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
35 Fluctuating prize winning device 47 Ball flow path forming member 47a1 Front surface portion (first member)
47a2 Rear surface (second member)
47a3 1st clearance part (regulation part)
47b1 Left side (first member)
47b2 Right side (second member)
47b3 second gap (regulator)
62 Taiko drum (predetermined member)
63c Rear discharge flow path forming member (discharge area forming member)
63c1 Projection piece (projection part)
65a Protection member (re-entry restriction part)
77 V movable member (movable member)
80 Determination device (determination means)
82 Horizontal movable member (first movable member)
85 Vertical movable member (second movable member)
100 Game control device (round number determination means, production execution determination means)
300 production control device (round lottery production execution means)
1000 Third relay board (board)
1001 Connector 1700 First mounting portion 1800 Second mounting portion D1 Special figure 1 display (display device)
D2 Special figure 2 display (display device)

Claims (3)

With multiple specific areas,
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a gaming ball flows into any of the specific areas,
A display device that displays a stop symbol selected from a plurality of stop symbols after variably displaying a plurality of identification symbols;
Based on the selected stop symbol, an opening pattern determining means for determining an opening pattern of a special winning opening,
Round number determination means for determining the number of round games in the special gaming state based on the selected stop symbol and the specific area into which the game ball has flowed,
The plurality of stop symbols include a plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to the first release pattern of the release patterns, and a second release pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first release pattern of the release patterns. A plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to
The plurality of first stop symbols are more advantageous to the player than the plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to the first number of round games and the first number of round games. Including a first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times,
The plurality of second stop symbols includes a plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times, and a second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times,
Said first number of times, both when you different values corresponding to the specific area game ball has flown, the second number is a fixed value regardless of the specific area gaming ball has flowed,
A ratio at which a first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of first stop symbols, and a second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times from the plurality of second stop symbols. and the proportion is selected, but depends,
The highest selected ratio of the first stopped symbols corresponding to the first number of times and the highest selected proportion of the second stopped symbols corresponding to the first number of times. In the second stop symbol, the round lottery effect in which the number of round games is apparently drawn is not executed,
Selection among the first stop symbols other than the first stop symbol with the highest selected ratio among the plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times and the plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times in the second stop symbol rate is other than the highest second stop symbols to be, a game machine, wherein Rukoto the round drawing effect is performed.   The second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times from among the plurality of second stop symbols than the ratio at which the first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from among the plurality of first stop symbols. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a ratio of selecting is higher. With multiple specific areas,
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a gaming ball flows into any of the specific areas,
A display device that displays a stop symbol selected from a plurality of stop symbols after variably displaying a plurality of identification symbols;
Based on the selected stop symbol, an opening pattern determining means for determining an opening pattern of a special winning opening,
Round number determination means for determining the number of round games in the special gaming state based on the selected stop symbol and the specific area into which the game ball has flowed,
The plurality of stop symbols include a plurality of first stop symbols and a plurality of second stop symbols,
The plurality of first stop symbols are more advantageous to the player than the plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to the first number of round games and the first number of round games. Including a first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times,
The plurality of second stop symbols includes a plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times, and a second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times,
Said first number of times, both when you different values corresponding to the specific area game ball has flown, the second number is a fixed value regardless of the specific area gaming ball has flowed,
The first stop symbol corresponding to the first number of times corresponds to a first release pattern of the release patterns,
The first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times corresponds to a symbol corresponding to the first release pattern and a second release pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first release pattern of the release patterns. And including
The second stop symbol corresponding to the first number of times and the second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times correspond to the second release pattern,
A ratio at which a first stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times is selected from the plurality of first stop symbols, and a second stop symbol corresponding to the second number of times from the plurality of second stop symbols. the percentage being selected, but Ri same der,
The highest selected ratio of the first stopped symbols corresponding to the first number of times and the highest selected proportion of the second stopped symbols corresponding to the first number of times. In the second stop symbol, the round lottery effect in which the number of round games is apparently drawn is not executed,
Selection among the first stop symbols other than the first stop symbol with the highest selected ratio among the plurality of first stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times and the plurality of second stop symbols corresponding to the first number of times in the second stop symbol rate is other than the highest second stop symbols to be, a game machine, wherein Rukoto the round drawing effect is performed.

Images